JP2020010990A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase manageability and maintainability in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine in which a special game state advantageous to a player can be generated when a stop result of a variation display game to variably display identification information is a special result includes: control means for performing control related to the game; and setting change means capable of changing a set value related to a game condition. The control means can receive input different from input on the change of the set value, in a setting change state in which the set value can be changed by the setting change means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 76

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state, in association with a display result of a variable display game that changes identification information being a special result.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine capable of changing a set value according to a setting relating to a game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-6-238056

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, when a setting value is changeable in a setting change state, inputs relating to management and maintenance of the gaming machine, such as hall settings and operation checks, are not accepted. There was room for improvement in sex.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to improve the manageability and maintainability of a gaming machine.

  In a representative embodiment of the present invention, when a stop result of a variable display game for displaying identification information in a variable manner is a special result, a game-related control in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player is performed. Control means for performing, and setting change means capable of changing a set value relating to a game condition, wherein the control means sets the set value when the set value is changeable by the setting change means. It is characterized in that it is possible to receive an input different from an input relating to the change of the.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, manageability and maintainability of a gaming machine can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half of the main processing of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure showing the example of a display of a performance display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure suspension information determination process (the first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure suspension information determination processing (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a prefetch big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 game process (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 game process (the latter half). FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a usual process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a procedure of an ordinary process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fall lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table which illustrates a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a fall probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a table which illustrates distribution of a big hit type. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a time shortening change frequency update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process (first half) during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process (the latter half) during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 big hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 3. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing a main process of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows a reception command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a look-ahead symbol system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch fluctuation | variation system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit command processing. It is a time chart of a setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect concerning 1st Embodiment. It is an example of the table which shows the relationship between the setting suggestion effect and the big hit according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition figure of the setting suggestion effect concerning 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a screen transition figure (the first half) of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a screen transition figure (the latter half) of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a time chart of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a screen transition figure (the first half) of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a screen transition figure (the latter half) of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of other setting suggestion effects concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram explaining another example of other setting suggestion effects concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows the correspondence between the set value for work of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment, the set value for display probability (setting example 1, 2, 3, 4), and production control information. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the display probability set value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the display aspect of the display probability set value of the setting example 3 or the setting example 4 of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 1st modification of the display mode of the display probability set value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 2nd modification of the display mode of the display probability set value of the example 2 of a setting in the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 3rd modification of the display mode of the display probability set value of the example 2 of a setting in the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 4th modification of the display mode of the display probability set value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 5th modification of the display mode of the display probability set value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of single command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board at the time of a setting change state concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is another example of the front view of the game board at the time of the setting change state which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output etc. in the special game state of the normal operation according to the fourth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output etc. at the time of a power failure occurring at the time of the special game state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and normal recovery by power recovery. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output etc. when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment and a memory abnormality occurs in the power recovery. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of signal output etc. at the time of a power failure occurring in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, normal recovery by power recovery, and shifting to the setting confirmation state. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of signal output etc. at the time of a power failure occurring in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, normal recovery by power recovery, and shifting to the setting change state. A timing chart showing an example of signal output timing when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is turned off after the power is restored after normal power recovery and the setting change state in the power recovery. It is.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction as viewed from the player playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame which is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable and closable via a hinge. The opening / closing frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is provided on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front face of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 can be viewed.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. In addition, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) disposed on the back side of the game board 30 and the like. Can be.

  Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light in accordance with a game state are provided at the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorating devices 18a and 18b each contain an illumination member such as an LED therein, and emit light according to a game state. The illumination members provided inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper speaker 19a is provided at each of the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15. Apart from the upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided below the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 extending in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projecting forward (toward the player) is provided. The protruding effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emitting effect or the like in accordance with the progress of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to a lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball rental operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a luminous effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is interposed in a special figure variable display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or to execute a notice effect in which a result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory is announced in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and if the variable display game is simply referred to as a variable figure display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operation device during the non-execution.

  Note that the game state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a time-saving state as a specific game state, a state in which the occurrence probability of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a fluctuation display game is high (probable change state, probability change state), a big hit state (special game state). ), A small hitting game state (small hitting state).

  Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games is executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  Further, whether or not to generate a probability change state may not necessarily be determined by the big hit symbol random number, but may be made to always generate a probability change state when a big hit occurs. A probable change state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used for discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These buttons are operated by the player. The balance display section 26 is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED therein, and performs a lighting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on a front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 having the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower right speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The shooting speed of the game ball fired from the ball shooting device is set so as to increase as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball firing device can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) at which game balls are fired into the game area, in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and play the game in various firing modes having different firing forces. Can fire a ball. The firing modes include left-handed (normal hit) in which a game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball hole 23a penetrating the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation section 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

(Game board)
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on a front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a windmill, an obstruction nail, or the like is provided as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At a substantially center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variably displaying (variably displaying) a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to a device including a liquid crystal display, and may include a display such as an EL or CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display section) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and a character that creates a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, the center case 40 has an inflow port 40a into a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which game balls passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game balls rolled on the stage portion 40b are transferred to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and a part of the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the general-purpose starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided. When a game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, a general-purpose variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning port (start port 1, first start winning area) 36 for providing a start condition of the special figure change display game is provided. In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, below the general-purpose starting gate 34, a normal variable prize device 37 (a normal electric accessory, having a second starting prize port (starting port 2, second starting prize area)). (Puden) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts into a state in which a game ball easily flows by sliding so as to retract from the front to the back side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, game balls cannot enter the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a special figure fluctuation display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It is to be noted that a game ball can easily enter the starting winning opening 36 when left-handed, and a game ball can easily enter the normal variable winning device 37 when right-handed.

  The movable member 37b is a slide-opening / closing type ordinary electric accessory, and operates via the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the general-purpose change display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. When opened, the game ball changes to an open state in which it is easy to flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

  The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the general-floor variation display game or making the hit probability of the general-floor variation display game higher than normal, By making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above, the time saving state (general power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Note that, also in the probable change state (except the latent probable change state), the time saving state (general power support state) occurs repeatedly.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, an attacker type opening the lower winning opening that opens the big winning opening by retracting from the front to the back side by the lower winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7). A first special fluctuation winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening / closing door 38c is provided. The first special fluctuation winning device 38 converts the state of the special winning opening from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state advantageous for the player) based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and By facilitating the flow of the game balls into the special winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize balls) is provided to the player. Note that a lower special winning opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided in the lower special winning opening as detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable prize winning device 38 makes it easier for game balls to win when hitting right.

  In the game area 32 above the normal fluctuation winning device 37, there is an opening / closing door 39c that opens the upper winning hole by turning the upper end side to the right side by the upper winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A second special fluctuation winning device 39 is provided. The second special fluctuation winning device 39 converts the state of the special winning opening from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, By facilitating the flow of the game balls into the special winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize balls) is provided to the player. In addition, inside the special winning opening, an upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening. It should be noted that a game ball can be easily won in the second special variable winning device 39 when right-handed. In addition, the lower special winning opening switch 38a and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as a special winning opening switch 43.

  A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), a probable change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the end of the big hit is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only in the case of the probability change big hit so that the game ball can easily pass. Note that the game control device 100 can detect the passage (V winning) of the game ball to the specific area 86 via a sensor (a specific area switch 72 described later) or the like, and upon detecting the V winning, shifts to the certain change state after the end of the big hit. And sends information (such as a specific area passage command) indicating that there is a V prize to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

  When a game ball wins a large winning opening of the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) sets the winning opening. The number of prize balls according to the type of prize balls are discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In the lower game area 32, an out port 30b is provided for collecting game balls that did not win a winning port or the like. In addition, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 and the vicinity thereof include LEDs (e.g., a board decoration device described later) that can emit light when a game ball wins. 46 is disposed.

  In addition, a special figure change display game (a special figure 1 change display game, a special figure 2 change display game) and a normal figure change display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A batch display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure change display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure change for a change display game, which is configured by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. A display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), a variable display unit 53 for general-purpose variable display game (general-purpose display, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each variable display game It has a storage display unit (a special figure 1 reservation display 54, a special figure 2 reservation display 55, and a general figure reservation display 56) for reporting the number of storages. The special figure 1 hold display 54 includes lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold display 55 includes lamps D13 and D14. The general-purpose display 56 is constituted by lamps D15 and D16.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, a lamp) for notifying that the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally-handed). D7), a second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time reduction state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time reduction state, and the probability of a big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is high. The third game state display unit 59 (third game state display, probability state display unit, lamp D9) for displaying the state, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special fluctuation winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed) Is provided. The round display unit 60 (lamp D3-D6) for displaying.

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display in which the identification information (for example, the center segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing a variable display. In addition, all of the LEDs provided as a display are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinking), cyclically turned on (turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time from any one of the LEDs), or a plurality. The lighting may be performed by turning on / off (flashing) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the ordinary figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Also, the general figure display 53 can be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) for performing a variable display (flashing) in which a lighting display and a non-lighting display are repeated as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and starting of each special figure variable display game. It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for informing the (reserved) storage number. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blink cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). While the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1 and special figure 1 reserved LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserved number (first start storage number) by a combination of the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED1, special figure 2 hold LED2) display the number of special figure 2 hold (second start storage number) by a combination of the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. I do. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds when a big hit occurs. However, in a case other than the state of the big hit (including a case where a reach described later occurs on the display device 41), the display of the number of holds is displayed. Do.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the ordinary figure change display game and the special figure change display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstruction nails, windmills and the like arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening. 36, the normal fluctuation prize device 37, or the special fluctuation prize device 38, 39 is won, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning hole that has won the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 through.

  The general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the general-purpose change display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number for collision determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the general figure variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure variable display game is already running and the general figure variable display game is not ended, or when the result of the general figure variable display game is When the variable prize device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, if the general-purpose starting storage number is less than the upper limit number, the storage number is added (+1).

  The hit figure starting memory stores a hit determination random value for determining a hit / fall of the hit picture variation display game, and when the hit determination random value matches the judgment value, the hit figure variation display is performed. The game results in a specific result mode (specific result).

  The general figure change display game is executed on the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is constituted by an LED that indicates a hit in a lighting state as normal identification information (general figure) and indicates a deviation in a non-lighting state, and blinks the LED to change the normal identification information. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined change display time has elapsed.

  If the ordinary figure random number value extracted at the time of passing through the ordinary figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary figure display 53 stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball is transferred to the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning port 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special figure 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

  At the time of detecting the winning prize ball of the special figure change display game, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, each change pattern random number, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in a special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to eight times). The stored number of the special figure start prize storage is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for informing the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 change display game (first special figure change display game) and the special figure 2 change display game (second special figure change display game) are identified by the identification information (the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52). This is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying the special symbols and special symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous fluctuating machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be independently (simultaneously) executed. If a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (in this embodiment, there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result. I do. If a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss.

  If a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display After the small hit operation regarding the game, the suspended special figure 1 variable display game can be resumed.

  In addition, when a game ball wins in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by right-handing in the normal game state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, but basically fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes). Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this time, the game is forcibly stopped and stopped.

  The display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like) are varied and displayed in correspondence with each special figure variation display game.

  In the decorative special symbol change display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order (scroll display), the symbols that fluctuate after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure fluctuating display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of a character are performed to enhance interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game, the fourth special symbol is repeatedly displayed (flashed) on the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 as another decorative special symbol (identification information). fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 stops at a predetermined time after the start, with "off" in the case of a loss and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

  As for the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display regions, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in a device or a display area. In addition, the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may both be in the running state (running state) at the same time.

  If the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived based on the displayed symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numerals such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

  At this time, the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 are changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the special winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (see FIG. 3). Is converted. In other words, the special winning opening provided in the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 opens greatly for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which time the player can acquire many game balls. Granted.

  When a game ball is won in the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the small hit value), the special figure variable display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

  At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (see FIG. 3). In addition, the total opening time of the special winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state). Value (number of acquired balls) is small. In addition, in both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state, and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. Is used as a term having the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting a big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting a small hit flag. Is released.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure change display games are not executed at the same time. It is set as follows.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  Also, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (38a) , 39a) include a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. It is used. In addition, a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like includes a machine. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board). The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). CPU section 110 having an input port, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110 with the input section 120 and the output section 130. Etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. Oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from a 32 V DC voltage. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 when a power failure occurs, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. With the provision, the cost can be reduced by excluding the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly set. Is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotation operation or the like to change a probability set value (set value) according to a setting related to a game condition (game). Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability set value is a set value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability, but other game conditions (effects, etc.) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability set value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing settings (probability set values) relating to game conditions. Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a dedicated set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

  The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10 so that they can be operated (unaccessible) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. Is done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

  As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value in accordance with the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting check state (setting check mode) in which a probability set value can be checked.

  In the present embodiment, the probability setting values are defined, for example, in six stages, and are set at probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), and probability setting value 4 (setting 4), a probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and a probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

  In the probability setting change process, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) → Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) ) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) →. Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For the sake of explanation, during the setting change state (setting change mode), work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. The values may be arranged in a numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) and handled as the same (the set value for work and the set value for probability are set to the same numerical value).

  Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (set value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability set value. Further, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. Then, the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting value of 0 to 5 is, for example, a performance display device 152 which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111b stores invariable information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, and the like) for game control in a nonvolatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random numbers at the time of game control, and stores information related to the game (game information), and stores and retains the stored information even if a power failure occurs. Can be a holding storage means. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  The ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game fluctuates a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. In the case where the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right and middle after the display and the result mode is displayed, the state where the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a state in which any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meets the condition of the special result mode (for example, the same identification information (Excluding the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N-reach) as a reach effect system (kind) having a different possibility (different degree of expectation) from which a special result mode (big hit mode) is derived, Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) of the jackpot is set to be higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit occurs). In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a small jackpot for determining the small jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a pattern random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including an execution time of the fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display without various reach or reach), and the like. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

  In addition, in the process related to the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure change display game as the current game state, For example, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111a forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball rental.

  An input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34 a of the general-purpose starting gate 34, and a starting port 1 in the first starting winning port 36. The switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37 (ordinary variable winning device), the winning port switch 35a of the general winning port 35, the large winning port switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (lower winning port). The switch is connected to the mouth switch 38a and the top winning port switch 39a). A negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is inputted, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is inputted. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for conversion is provided.

  Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects the passage (V winning) of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through a remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only game balls that pass through the out port 30b, or may detect all game balls that have been fired into the game area and have finished playing.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining sphere discharge port switch 73, or the out sphere detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

  In addition, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like, and detects a glass frame opening provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the like. A switch 63, a signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (body frame), and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibration of the gaming machine 10 are input. .

  The second input port 123 receives a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a not-shown test shooting device via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the third input port 124 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball out switch signal indicating an insufficient game ball before payout, and an overflow. A first input port 122 which takes in an overflow switch signal, a touch switch signal based on an input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and a signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (that is, when the game balls are full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and the payout busy signal indicates whether the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not it is.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. However, each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is impossible.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. I have. The chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 has a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) for opening the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and opening / closing data for the lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86 Two output ports 134 are provided.

  The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid driving signal, and outputs the first driver (driving). Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the current 50, and a fourth driver that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

  32 V DC is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138 a in order to drive a solenoid operated at 32 V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134 and outputs a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of seven-segment displays (eight-segment displays including the dot Dp) (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

  The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided in another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display the display probability set value, the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of ejected balls.

  Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls passing through the winning opening (the number of winning) and the game passing through the out opening 30b. It is the sum with the number of spheres. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting (counting) the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 and the like. In the present embodiment, the winning opening includes a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning ports) are included.

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of awarded balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of fired balls), and is calculated by (acquired number of balls / number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of obtained balls per 100 discharged balls (total number of award balls).

  For example, the ratio of the bonuses may be determined as the big hit state in the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls obtained for each role) obtained by winning the special winning opening (= the so-called continuous role ratio). It should be noted that the accessory ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big winning opening (= big winning opening ratio) among all the winning balls. Or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called common use ratio (total common use ratio) )).

(Direction control device)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 are provided.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and control of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is provided with a sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via the command I / F 331 are converted into a production control command signal (production command). As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. Note that the board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, and drives a motor and a solenoid. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for judging a hit in a general figure based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34 and reads the ROM 111b. Is compared with the judgment value stored in the game, and it is judged whether or not the normal figure change display game is hit.

  Then, after the identification symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display, a general symbol fluctuating display game in which the symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the general fluctuating display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the general fluctuating display, the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuating winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, The opening control is performed as described above (for 0.3 second). That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). When the result of the general-floor variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out-of-position on the general-purpose display.

  In addition, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is stored based on the starting memory. A random number for use is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether the special figure 1 variable display game is hit or not.

  In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the random number value for the big hit determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stored based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has been hit.

  Then, the CPU 111 a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure change display game is displayed in which the identification symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined time and then stopped. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning region (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37). Make

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure change display game is a hit. Let it. In the processing for generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls the large winning opening solenoid 39b to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39, for example, to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. .

  Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the special winning opening. Opening the special winning opening until such condition is achieved is defined as one round (R), and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15, 11, or 2) (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that performs control to open and close the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state (probable change state) is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. In the time-saving state, control is performed so that the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 are in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 per unit time is more controlled than when the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 is in the normal operation state. The control is performed so that the opening time of the battery is substantially increased, so that the power transmission support state is set. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) except the latent probability change state, the time reduction state is duplicated and the general power support (electric support) is executed.

  For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to perform a time-reduction variation in which the execution time (the general-purpose variation time) of the general-purpose variation display game is changed to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time reduction state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction change of the special figure change display game is also executed.

  Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). It is.

  Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal-floating display game is hit and the normal-variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal-power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control so as to be longer than the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening (for example, four times). Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of the winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing any one or more of the general figure fluctuation time, the general figure stop time, the number of general power release times, the general power release time, and the general figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game per unit time can be increased compared to the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, the setting may be made so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. In addition, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated simultaneously, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transition state at power-on]
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power is restored). As described above, according to the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

  First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability set value (set value) can be changed. (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 6B and FIG. 8).

  Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, a transition is made to a setting check state (setting check mode) in which the probability set value can be checked (FIG. 6B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 8).

  If the setting key switch 93 is turned off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on when the power is turned on, a transition is made to a RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode), and RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) is performed. Processing) is executed, and the RAM 111c is initialized (see A1042 to 1044 in FIG. 6B).

  If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 which is performed at a predetermined time period (4 msec (millisecond) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 includes a main program (calling routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. .

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. 6A and 6B are flowcharts showing a procedure of a main process by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. Note that, in the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the reference sign (number) of the step is represented as “A ****”.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs is executed (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibition state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibition state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, so that the firing of game balls is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

  Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of a sub control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as a main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the device is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The time of the power supply delay timer is measured by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the elapse of the standby time, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the counting of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not a power failure has occurred by reading a power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via a port and a data bus. (A1008). If a power failure has occurred (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the game machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  If no power failure has occurred (result of A1008 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1009) and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control device 100 reads / writes RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. The access to the memory is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1012).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in the game microcomputer 111 in advance and used in the present embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (A1013) ).

  Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In the present embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

  Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c) (A1015). Here, a flag on the assumption of abnormality is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (the result of A1016 is “Y”), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

  Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM is cleared (A1020). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of Step A1021.

  Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1016 is “N” or result of A1017 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is “N”), the process shifts to the process of step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change of steps A1027 to A1037. .

  When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c). It is determined whether or not it has been performed (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the probability setting change flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting change flag is not set (result of A1023 is “N”), the process of checking the probability setting (during the setting check state, in the setting check mode) in steps A1031 to A1037, and the processing in steps A1041 to 1044. The RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) or the processing at steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 when power is normally turned on (when power is restored) is executed.

  When the probability setting change flag is set (result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 notifies the game control apparatus 100 (main board, main board) that there is an abnormality in the main abnormality. An error notification command is transmitted to effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the main error error notification command notifies that the game control device 100 has an error.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 causes the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of “E1” in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped on the performance display device 152. (A1025). Then, it outputs on data of a security signal for notifying an external device (such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) or an information collecting terminal) of an abnormality to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the big hit signal, are kept in the off state. After that, the processing in steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and then the setting is changed again (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) and the power is turned on. While the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), and a timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing. Since (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure change display game, ordinary figure change display game) cannot be executed.

  As described above, it is determined that an abnormality occurs when the probability setting change flag is set even though the setting change operation (the operation of turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not performed. , A1024-A1026. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted during the change of the probability setting (before the setting change is completed), the flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed may be set even though the setting change operation has not been performed. is there.

  On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 provides a main abnormality error notification for notifying that the game control device 100 (main board) has an abnormality. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) at the time of the game stop is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), On-data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). Note that, similarly to the above, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the big hit signal, are maintained in the off state. Thereafter, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and the process stands by.

  When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (result of A1027 is “Y”), the probability set value stored in the probability set value area of the RAM 111c is cleared because it is unknown whether the probability set value is correct or not. Then, after setting the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028), the probability setting change flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1027 is “N”), the probability setting change flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command in the process of changing the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command that the probability setting is being changed notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

  In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”). If the probability setting change flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is “Y”), the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, and the process during the probability setting confirmation (during the setting confirmation state) starts, A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command under the probability setting confirmation is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the flow shifts to the process of step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

  After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the change of the probability setting and the confirmation of the probability setting.

  First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal during the change of the probability setting and the confirmation of the probability setting (A1034). Note that the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in a probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 8) described later. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). During the change of the probability setting and the confirmation of the probability setting, the security signal is output for at least 50 ms.

  Next, the game control device 100 permits an interrupt (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the processing at the time of the power failure occurrence in steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

  As described above, as long as the setting key switch 93 is ON and a power failure does not occur, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability set value can be changed, or the probability set value can be confirmed. The setting check state (setting check mode) is continued.

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A1036 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prohibits the interruption (A1038), and issues a notification end command to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the notification end command ends notification that probability setting is being confirmed or notification that probability setting is being changed.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting change flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1040). If the probability setting change flag is set (result of A1040 is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, the RAM initialization processing (described later) in steps A1042 to A1044 is executed. I do. On the other hand, when the probability setting change flag is not set (result of A1040 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being checked, the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform normal processing of.

  When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set value in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability set value stored in the probability set value area. Further, the probability setting change flag described above is also cleared here. Here, in addition to the probability set value area, a configuration in which the stack area and the unused area are not cleared, and a configuration in which the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared are also possible. . The performance information is derived based on the number of winning balls obtained by winning, and includes, for example, a payout rate, a base value (a payout rate in a normal game state), an accessory ratio, a discharge ball count, and the like. is there.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of RAM initialization in an area to be initialized (A1043). Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the flow shifts to the process of step A1047.

  On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1041 is “N”), the game control device 100 returns the normal power supply because the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are both off. The process at the time of turning on (when the power is restored) is started, and the power failure restoration process is executed (A1045). For example, an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure (at the time of power restoration) is saved in an area to be initialized. Also, the above-described probability setting confirmation flag is cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047 is performed. Move to the processing of.

  The command for initializing the RAM transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for restoring the power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine and a hold of the special figures 1 and 2. Special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating number, probability information command indicating presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure change in predetermined effect mode An effect number information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on are included.

  Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of restoration from power failure include a set value information command (probability set value information command) indicating set value information which is information of a probability set value (set value) of the gaming machine 10. It is. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. Production control can be performed.

  The RAM initialization command includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and informs the RAM initialization (RAM clear) using the LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the like and the sound of the speaker 30. Perform for seconds. Further, the command at the time of restoration from the power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display content of the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen designation command is a customer waiting demonstration command when the special figures 1 and 2 are both being processed normally (when they are not fluctuating or hitting), and otherwise are restoration screen commands.

  After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method of transposing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines

  In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and sets various corresponding initial value random numbers (the big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of small hit symbol random number that determines small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of hit random number that determines hit of ordinary figure (hit initial value random number) As a start value of the initial value of the random number of the falling lottery used in the falling lottery (initial random number of the falling lottery) and the like, it is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and interruption is permitted (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain unauthorized random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the falling lottery random number is configured to be generated using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit. I have. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the drop lottery random number are timer interrupts which are processing units of the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle as the process (a different CTC (CTC2) from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process).

  In addition, the so-called "initial value changing method" is used for the big hit symbol random number, the hit symbol random number, and the drop lottery random number, in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits the interruption (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing the performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (such as an accessory ratio or a payout ratio) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). Thereafter, the interruption is permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. Thereby, the processing of steps A1050 to A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

  When a power failure occurs (result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing when a power failure occurs, temporarily prohibits interruption (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, a timer interrupt process is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first specifies the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets a higher address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing for inputting signals from various sensors and switches and capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is “Y”), a probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

  When neither the probability setting is changed nor the probability setting is confirmed (result of A1304 is "N"), the game control device 100 controls the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b) based on the output data set in various processes. An output process for performing drive control of the actuator or the like is executed (A1306). Note that, when a firing prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to a state in which the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), and further performs a random number update process 1 (A1308). Processing 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning port switch 38a, the upper winning port switch 39a, whether or not there is a normal signal input, and monitoring of an error. A winning port switch / state monitoring process for performing (for example, whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) is executed (A1310).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of game balls is occurring at the special winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set in the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. If abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is “Y”), the processing after step A1317 is executed.

  When the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs a start-up switch monitoring process of monitoring a winning in the start-up opening by the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a. Execute (A1312). Subsequently, a special figure 1 game process for performing a process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and then a special figure 2 game process for performing a process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a general-purpose game process for performing a process relating to the general-purpose change display game (A1315). A segment LED editing process is provided to drive the segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure changing game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1316).

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet illegality monitoring process of checking a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio fraud monitoring process (panel radio fraud monitoring process) for determining whether there is any abnormality by checking a detection signal from the radio sensor 62 of the gaming board is executed (A1318).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process of monitoring fraud by vibration based on an input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the special winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special winning opening switches 43 (lower winning opening switch 38a and upper winning opening switch 39a), the special area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge opening in the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are used. Based on the input from the switch 73, the abnormal discharge of the special fluctuation winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when abnormal discharge occurs, an abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set. The game balls that have passed through the special winning opening switches 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharging switch 73.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1321). Then, a performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing ends.

  When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank specification are automatically performed. However, depending on the CPU used, the interruption is permitted after the external information editing processing. May be performed, or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability set value can be changed or confirmed.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability set value here is stored in the probability set value area of the RAM 111c.

  When the probability set value is within the normal range (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and sets the performance display device 152. Is output via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (result of A2401 is “N”), the light-off data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

  Here, the probability set value display data is data of a display probability set value displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among persons involved in the hall, etc., if the probability setting value is different, if the same big hit probability (and small hit probability) is used, the display probability set value is associated with the big hit probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 unless the security signal control timer is 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Subsequently, on data of a security signal for notifying an external device (such as a game arcade internal management device (a hall computer)) of an abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the big hit signal, are maintained in the off state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting change flag is not set (result of A2407 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

  When the probability setting change flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 performs the first timer interrupt processing after power-on. It is determined whether or not (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

  When it is not the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

  When there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. In addition to the +1 update, the probability set values 1 to 6 in the probability set value area are updated by +1 corresponding to the work set value (A2410). Thus, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability set value in the probability set value area is updated by one. Thereafter, the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. Note that a value corresponding to the probability set value read from the probability set value area (1 from the probability set value) is stored in a work set value area (in the RAM 111c or a register) for storing a work set value when the setting change mode is entered. (Subtracted value) may be stored.

  In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability set value in the probability set value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work set value. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the setting value for the operation is stored in the area. The value corresponding to the work setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. With this configuration, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (result of A1037 is “Y”), the probability setting value used for game control, effect control, and the like (the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) Value) can be prevented from being changed with an unintended value.

[Display example on performance display device]
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the performance display device 152. The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Each digit of the performance display device 152 has 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, and f, g, and Dp.

  In the example of FIG. 9A, while the probability setting is being changed, a lit display of “SET” is displayed in digits 1 to 3 to indicate that the setting is being changed. On the other hand, in the case of the digit 0, the display probability setting value is set to, for example, “1” to “6”, corresponding to the work setting values 0 to 5 that are switched each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting change. It is switched on and displayed.

  In the example of FIG. 9B, when the probability setting value is not within the normal range but abnormal (result of A2401 is “N”), light-off data is set as probability setting value display data (A2403), and digit 0 is set. Turns off. The display of “SET” indicating that the setting is being changed in the digits 1 to 3 is not turned off.

  In the example of FIG. 9C, when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on (the result of A1022 is “Y”), or when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed). In (A1023 result "Y"), 7-segment display data error display "E1" at the time of game stop is lit on digits 1 and 2 (A1024).

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the start-up switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a start-up opening 1 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (start-up opening 1) (A2701), and obtains a hard random number acquisition process for obtaining a hard random number as a jackpot random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not the first opening winning opening 36 has a winning opening (A2703). If there is no start opening winning (the result of A2703 is "N"), the flow shifts to the process of step A2709.

  When there is a start opening winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 is in a state where the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a low probability state and there is no time reduction (generic power support) Is determined (A2704). That is, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the special figure low probability & no time saving period (in the normal game state) (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (in a normal game state). Then, in the case of the low probability state and the state without time saving (the result of A2704 is “Y”), that is, in the case of the normal gaming state, the flow shifts to the process of step A2707.

  The game control device 100 determines that the jackpot occurrence probability is not the low probability state (the case of the high probability state) or the state with the time saving (the state with the ordinary power support) (the result of A2704 is “N”). A right-turn instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). Thus, when there is a start opening prize to the first start winning opening 36 in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state, the effect control device 300 displays a right-hand instruction display for instructing a right-hand as a warning as the display device 41. Can be displayed. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by winning in the first starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2707), and executes a special figure starting port switch common process (A2708). ).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 2 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning port, starting port 2) (A2709), and sets a hard random number as a jackpot random number. A hard random number acquisition process to be acquired is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize to the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 (A2711). When there is no start opening winning (the result of A2711 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

  When there is a start opening prize to the normal variable prize device 37 (result of A2711 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal variable prize device 37 is in operation (during normal power operation). A determination is made (A2712). If the normal variable prize device 37 is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a fraud (normal telephone fraud) on the normal variable prize device 37 is occurring (A2713). When the number of unauthorized winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of unauthorized occurrence determinations (for example, five or more), it can be determined that general telephone fraud is occurring. If the fraud on the normal variable prize device 37 is occurring (result of A2713 is “Y”), the start-up switch monitoring process ends.

  The game control device 100 sets a table for setting information of suspension by winning in the normal variable prize device 37 (starting port 2) when the fraud on the normal variable prize device 37 is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”). It prepares (A2714), executes the special figure startup port switch common processing (A2715), and ends the startup port switch monitoring processing.

  When an irregularity with respect to the normal variable prize device 37 is occurring (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not execute the process of step A2713, but executes the processes of steps A2714 and A2715.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special drawing starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first outputs information on the number of winnings to the monitored start-up switch among the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output frequency area of the RWM (A2904), and the flow shifts to the process of step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (the number of start storages) corresponding to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target opening opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates an address of a random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. It is saved in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a drop lottery random number for selecting a fall from the high probability state of the jackpot probability of the special map to the low probability state (A2912), and stores the fall lottery random number. It is saved in the area (A2913).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a prize to the normal variable prize device 37 (starting port 2) (A2914). If it is not a prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 (result of A2914 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A2917. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A2914 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2915) and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2916). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2917), and executes a special figure reservation information determination process (A2918). Then, a start port switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as effect commands (A2919), and effect command setting processing (A2920) is executed to execute the special figure start port switch common. The process ends. The decoration special figure reservation number command is a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command for the opening 1 switch 36a, and a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command for the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning prize port 36 or the start winning prize area of the normal variable winning device 37, and has the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first start storage up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, details of the special figure hold information determination processing (A2918) in the above-described special figure starting port switch common processing will be described. FIGS. 12A and 12B are flowcharts showing the first half and second half procedures of the special figure suspension information determination processing (pre-reading processing, advance determination processing). Note that the special figure reservation information determination processing is executed for the special figure 1 and 2 start memories generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning apparatus 37.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a big hit is being made (during a special game state) (A3001). If the big hit is in progress (result of A3001 is “Y”), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. If it is not a big hit (the result of A3001 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) is a winning (A3002). If the winning is to the starting opening 1 (result of A3002 is “Y”), that is, if the winning is to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), the pre-reading process (prior determination process) is executed. In order to do so, the process shifts to the process after step A3004.

  When the winning opening 1 is not a prize (the result of A3002 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the jackpot occurrence probability is a low probability state and there is no time saving (a state without ordinary power support). No, that is, it is determined whether or not the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (normal game state) (A3003). If the special figure low probability and no time saving are being performed (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. That is, in the case of a winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2) in the normal gaming state, the special figure reservation information determining process is terminated without executing the pre-reading process (prior determination process). In the normal game state, as described later, the special figure 2 change display game often has a long-term change (long change) and is forcibly terminated with a missed result. Do not execute.

  The game control device 100 sets the normal fluctuation prize device 37 (starting port 2) when the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (the result of A3003 is “N”), that is, in a state other than the normal game state (time saving state or probable change state). ), The flow shifts to the process after step A3004 to execute the pre-reading process (prior determination process).

  Then, the game control device 100 starts a pre-reading process (prior determination process) and determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in the high probability state, that is, whether or not the special figure high probability is being performed (A3004). . When the special figure high probability flag (in the present embodiment, the special figure high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. If the special figure high probability is in progress (result of A3004 is “Y”), it is determined whether the fall lottery random number prepared in step A2912 is within the range of the determination value of fall winning (A3005), and the prefetch fall lottery corresponding to the determination result is performed. An information command is prepared as an effect command (A3006), and effect command setting processing is performed (A3007). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a low-probability determination flag for performing a prefetch big hit determination in the low-probability state (A3008). When the special figure is not in the high probability state (result of A3004 is "N"), since there is no fall from the high probability state to the low probability state, the look-ahead process for the fall is performed without executing (A3005-A3007). The flow shifts to the process of A3008.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a prefetching jackpot determination process described later based on the jackpot random number prepared in step A2909 (A3009), and determines whether or not the determination result of the prefetching jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3010). ). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3010 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a or starting port 2 switch 37a) is set (A3011). Then, stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random numbers is acquired (A3012), and the flow shifts to the process of step A3019.

  When the determination result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is out of order (the result of A3010 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2) has a winning. (A3013). When the winning is to the starting opening 2 (result of A3013 is “Y”), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by the winning to the starting opening 2, so that the pre-reading regarding the small hit is performed. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3014), and it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3015). If the determination result is a small hit (result of A3015 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3016), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired (A3016). A3017), the flow shifts to the process of step A3019.

  When the winning is not made to the starting port 2 (the result of A3013 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 sets the out-of-stop symbol information because a small hit cannot be generated in the special figure 1 variable display game (A3018). ). In other words, if the result of the determination is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. If the result of the determination is not a small hit in the winning opening 2 (the result of A3015 is "N"), that is, if the result of the determination is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. (A3018). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of Step A3019.

  After steps A3012, A3017, and A3018, the game control device 100 saves the stopped symbol information in the symbol information area (A3019). The stopped symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in a variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command for low probability (low probability) corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3020), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3021).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability determination flag for performing a prefetch big hit determination in the high-probability state (A3022), and executes the processing of A3023-A3032 in the same manner as A3009-A3018. First, a prefetch big hit determination process described later is executed (A3023), and it is determined whether or not the result of the prefetch big hit determination process is a big hit (A3024). If the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3024 is "Y"), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a or starting port 2 switch 37a) is set (A3025). Then, stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random numbers is obtained (A3026), and the flow shifts to the process of step A3033.

  If the result of the pre-reading jackpot determination process is out of order (the result of A3024 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2) has a winning. (A3027). When the winning is to the starting opening 2 (result of A3027 is “Y”), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning the starting opening 2, so that the pre-reading regarding the small hit is performed. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3028), and it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3029). If the determination result is a small hit (result of A3029 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3030), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired (A3030). A3031), the flow shifts to the step A3033.

  When the winning is not made to the starting port 2 (the result of A3027 is “N”), the small hit cannot be generated in the special figure 1 variable display game, and thus the game control device 100 sets the outage stop symbol information (A3032). ). In other words, if the result of the determination is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. If the result of the determination is not a small hit due to the winning in the starting opening 2 (result of A3029 is “N”), that is, if the result of the determination is neither a big hit nor a small hit, misaligned stop symbol information is set. (A3032). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of Step A3033.

  After steps A3026, A3031, and A3032, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (A3033). When the special figure is in the high probability state (the result of A3033 is “Y”), the stopped symbol information is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area (A3034), and the process proceeds to step A3035. The stopped symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in a variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. When the special figure high probability is not present (the result of A3033 is “N”), the process shifts to the process of step A3035 without overwriting the stopped symbol information in the symbol information area.

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command for high probability (high probability) corresponding to the target start-up switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3035), and executes an effect command setting process (A3035). A3036).

  Subsequently, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is executed (A3037), and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game as pre-reading is executed. (A3038). Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern number indicating a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3039), an effect command setting process is executed (A3040), and a special figure suspension information determination process is performed. finish.

  The effect control device 300 receives both the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability), but if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in the low probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol command ( Pre-reading symbol command processing (FIG. 51) is executed using the low-probability pattern, and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in the high-probability state, the pre-reading symbol command processing is performed using the pre-reading stop symbol command (high probability). (FIG. 51) may be performed.

[Prefetch big hit determination processing]
Next, details of the prefetching big hit determination process (A3009, A3023) in the special figure suspension information determination process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the prefetch big hit determination process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3101), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3102). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets an outlier (other than the big hit) as the determination result (A3107), and performs the prefetch big hit determination process. finish.

  When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3102 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (A3103). If the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (result of A3103 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3104). On the other hand, if the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (if it is the low probability determination flag) (result of A3103 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3105). ).

  After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3106). If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3106 is “Y”), the judgment result is set to be out (other than the big hit) (A3107). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3106 is “N”), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3108). When the determination result is set, the prefetch big hit determination processing ends.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (A3201).

  If the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is not set (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control device 100 It is determined whether the state is in the state or the small hit state (A3202). When neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3202 is “N”), a special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, a specific area switch specific area switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

  Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A3205). The special figure 1 game processing timer is clocked for the interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interruption processing by updating -1. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. In the case of the big hit state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3202 is “Y”), the processing of step A3205 is performed without performing the processing of steps A3203 and A3204. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3206 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A3217.

  If the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, the game control apparatus 100 sets the special figure 1 game processing number to A special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3207). Further, a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is obtained using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3208). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed using the special figure 1 game processing number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number (A3209).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A3209, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, sets the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, and sets the effect. In addition, special figure 1 ordinary processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 changing processing is executed (A3210). The details of the special map 1 ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “1” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1, the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process, and the like. The processing during special figure 1 fluctuation to be performed is executed (A3211). The details of the special figure 1 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “2” in step A3209, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, The special figure 1 displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern of each big hit and setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval is executed (A3212). Details of the special figure 1 displaying process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “3” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and updates the information necessary for performing the special winning opening process. A fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3213). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “4” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the last round, and sets an ending command if the big hit round is the last round, A special winning opening opening process for setting information necessary for performing the special winning opening residual ball processing is executed (A3214).

  When the game processing number is “5” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets a time interval and an ending time, and sets information necessary for performing a jackpot ending process. The remaining mouth ball processing is executed (A3215).

  If the game processing number is “6” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or sets information necessary to execute the special figure 1 ordinary processing. Then, the special figure 1 big hit ending process for setting (S3216) is executed. The details of the special figure 1 big hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number ends, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process related to the container 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (result of A3201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A3202 to A3216. After performing the special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 without performing the processing (A3217), the symbol change control processing related to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3218). Then, a lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process ends. In this manner, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. Note that the special symbol change itself may be apparently continued on the special figure 1 display 51 by the symbol change control process.

[Special figure 2 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIGS. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing the first half and second half procedures of the special figure 2 game process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in a big hit state (A3301). When the special figure 1 variable display game is not in the big hit state (the result of A3301 is “N”), a special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

  Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A3304). The special figure 2 game processing timer is clocked for the interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interruption processing by updating −1. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

  When the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game is in progress (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs the process of step A3304 without performing the processes of steps A3302 and A3303.

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3305 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A3323.

  When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 It is determined whether the number of repetitions is 0 (A3306). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is “N”), the repetition number of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by −1 (A3307), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated. The timer value for long fluctuation (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3308). As will be described later, if the special figure 2 variable display game has a long fluctuation and the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), a timer for the fluctuation time cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3306-A3308 By repeating the count of the timer value for the long fluctuation by the number of repetitions by the processing of the above, a timer having a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared.

  The game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”) and that the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3306 is “Y”). The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register (A3309). Further, a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed using the special figure 2 game processing number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number (A3311).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A3311, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game, sets the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and sets the effect. Or, the special figure 2 ordinary processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 changing processing is executed (A3312). The details of the special map 2 ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “1” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2, the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process, and the like. The process during special figure 2 fluctuation to be performed is executed (A3313). The details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “2” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot fanfare command according to the type of the jackpot if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, The special figure 2 displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit and setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval is executed (A3314). The details of the special figure 2 displaying process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “3” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of open times, and updates the information necessary for performing the special winning opening process. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3315). The fanfare / interval processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “4” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the last round, and sets an ending command if the big hit round is the last round, A special winning opening process is performed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening residual ball process (A3316).

  When the game processing number is “5” in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, and a process of setting information necessary for performing a jackpot ending process. The remaining mouth ball processing is executed (A3317).

  When the game processing number is “6” in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 big hit end processing for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 ordinary processing ( A3318). The details of the special figure 2 big hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “7” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets information necessary for performing the small hitting process. Is executed during the small hit fanfare (A3319). The processing during the small hit fanfare will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “8” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets a small hitting end command, sets information necessary for performing a small hitting remaining ball process, and the like. The hit processing is executed (A3320).

  When the game processing number is “9” in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs processing for setting an ending time, setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 small hit end processing, and the like. The remaining ball processing is executed (A3321).

  When the game processing number is “10” in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end processing for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 ordinary processing. (A3322). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number ends, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2 display. The symbol variation control process related to the container 52 is executed (A3324), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 ordinary processing (A3210) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special map 1 ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 change display game can start changing (A3401). If the special figure 1 change display game is not possible to start the change (if the change start is not possible) (result of A3401 is "N"), the special figure 1 game processing number is set to the number "0" of the special figure 1 ordinary processing. (A3416), it saves in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3417). Here, from the end of the big hit change in the special figure 2 change display game (during the special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 2 big hit end processing), and from the special figure 2 change display game From the end of the small hit change (during the special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the small hit operation (special figure 2 small hit end processing), it is determined that the special figure 1 change display game cannot be started to change.

  When the special figure 1 change display game can start changing (the result of A3401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handing instruction has been notified (A3402). If the left-turn instruction notification command is already prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-turn instruction has been notified. If the left-handing instruction has been notified (the result of A3402 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A3406.

  If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified based on the left-handed instruction notification flag (result of A3402 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and performs the effect command setting process. Is executed (A3404), and a left-turn instruction notification flag indicating that the left-turn instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like is set (A3405).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (A3406). When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3406 is “Y”), the special figure 1 ordinary processing number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3402). As a result, until the reserved number of the special figure 1 becomes 1 or more, the normal processing of the special figure 1 is repeated.

  If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (the result of A3406 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the fluctuation start probability information corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the presence or absence of the time saving state. The command is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3408). Subsequently, special figure 1 change start processing for starting the special figure 1 change display game is executed (A3409). Thereafter, a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3411).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as a production command (A3412), and executes a production command setting process. (A3413). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining number-of-games command can grasp the number of times of time reduction fluctuation.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the information of the special figure 1 being changed in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that special figure 1 is changing, or (during special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, a special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing is executed to shift to the special figure 1 change processing (A3415). In the special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing, for example, the processing number “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

[Tokuzu 2 usual processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 ordinary processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special map 2 ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 change display game can start changing (A3501). If the special figure 2 change display game is not possible to start the change (if the change cannot be started) (result of A3501 is “N”), the special figure 2 game processing number is set to the special figure 2 ordinary processing number “0”. (A3518) The image data is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). Here, from the end of the big hit change of the special figure 1 change display game (during the special figure 1 display processing) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 1 big hit end processing), the special figure 2 change display game It is not possible to start.

  When the special figure 2 change display game can start changing (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of reservations is not 0 (result of A3502 is "N"), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the presence or absence of a time saving state is prepared as a production command. Then, the effect command setting process is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 change start process for starting the special figure 2 change display game is executed (A3505).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3506), and executes a production command setting process (A3506). A3507). Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as a production command (A3508), and executes a production command setting process. (A3509). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining number-of-games command can grasp the number of times of time reduction fluctuation.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets information of the special figure 2 being changed in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that special figure 2 is changing or (special figure 1 is changing + special figure 2 is changing) is set. Next, a special figure 2 change processing transition setting processing is executed to shift to the special figure 2 change processing (A3511). In the special figure 2 change processing transition setting processing, for example, the processing number “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area.

When the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (the result of A3502 is “Y”),
It is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (A3512). When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3512 is “Y”), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 change display game is being executed) (A3513). If the special map 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A3513 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3514). If the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (the result of A3514 is “N”), a customer waiting demonstration in progress flag is set (A3515).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516), and executes an effect command setting process (A3517). The effect control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demonstration command can execute a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41. Thereafter, the number "0" of the special figure 2 ordinary processing is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). Thereby, the special figure 2 usual processing is repeated until the special figure 2 reservation number becomes one.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (the result of A3512 is “N”), the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. A special process number 2 normal process number “0” is set as the game process number (A3518), and saved in the special process 2 game process number area of the RWM (A3519). Also, when the special map 1 is changing (the result of A3513 is “Y”), or when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (the result of A3514 is “Y”), a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared. Instead, the number “0” of the special figure 2 ordinary processing is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), and the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM is saved (A3519).

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 change start processing (A3409) in the special figure 1 ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a). It should be noted that the special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including sorting of a prefetch fluctuation pattern). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). Then, a fall lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot flag 1 for setting the jackpot flag 1 to determine whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit or not, and sets big hit flag 1 (A3605a). Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (A3606a) related to setting of one stop symbol (symbol information), special figure 1 information setting for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game The processing (A3607a) is executed.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the change pattern of the special figure 1 change display game is set (A3608a). ). Next, a special figure 1 change pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting a change pattern which is a change mode in the special figure 1 change display game, and a change start information setting process for setting information of start of change of the special figure 1 change display game (A3609a) A3610a) is executed. Then, a time reduction variation number update process for updating the time reduction variation number is executed (A3611a).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the process number to shift to the special figure 1 changing process (A3612a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A3613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (A3614a), and a signal (ON data of the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal) relating to the start of change of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the in-flight flag in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A3616a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (A3617a), and the special figure 1 changing symbol number area is saved. Then, the initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighted symbol) is saved (A3618a), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 change start processing (A3505) in the special figure 2 ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process.

  The special figure 2 change start processing is obtained by replacing “big hit flag 1” with “big hit flag 2” and “special figure 1” with “special figure 2” in the special figure 1 change start processing (FIG. 18). Since the same processing as the special figure 1 change start processing is performed, detailed description is omitted. Steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 change start processing correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 change start processing, respectively.

[Fall lottery process]
Next, details of the drop lottery process (A3604a, A3604b) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the drop lottery process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in the high probability state (probable change state), that is, whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A3701). When the special figure high probability is not in progress (result of A3701 is “N”), the falling lottery process ends.

  When the special figure high probability is present (the result of A3701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines that the value of the falling random number of the target (the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value. It is determined whether or not (A3702). If it is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is “Y”), the falling lottery process ends. If it is equal to or more than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is “Y”), the falling lottery process ends.

  When the value is equal to or less than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is “N”), the value of the target fall lottery random number becomes a value between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value. Therefore, the process at the time of the winning of the drop lottery is started, and first, a signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A3704). Here, the signals relating to the high probability termination are two big hits off data (off signal) and four big hits off data (off signal). As a result, a signal regarding the high-probability termination is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the high probability and the reduction of the working hours in the test signal output data area (A3705). The signal relating to the end of the high probability & shortening of time is, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and special symbol 2 fluctuation. This is the off data of the time reduction state signal.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the left-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A3708), and the falling lottery process ends. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the big hit probability is low and there is no time saving state (normal game state).

  As described above, in the probable change state (during special figure high probability), a fall lottery is executed at the start of each special figure change display game, and at the time of the win of the fall lottery, from the probable change state (high probability state) to the normal game state (low probable state). (A3704 to A3708).

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 change start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Subsequently, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (A3802). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0 (A3803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3804). If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3804 is “N”), a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big hit random value (A3805). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3806). If the result of the determination is a big hit (result of A3806 is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3801 (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed. finish. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 can be avoided at the same time. .

  If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3804 is “Y”), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3806 is “N”), the game control device 100 The flag 1 setting process ends.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the slip information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3901), and saves the slip information in the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3902). Subsequently, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM (for 1 reserved number) and prepared (A3903). Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 2 is the earliest). After that, the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A3905). If the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A3905 is “N”), a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big random number (A3906). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907). If the result of the determination is a big hit (result of A3907 is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the outlier information was saved in step A3902 (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting processing is performed. finish. The big hit flag 2 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 can be prevented from becoming a big hit at the same time. .

  If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A3905 is “Y”), or if the determination result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907 is “N”), the game control device 100 acquires A small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit is executed based on the random number value of the big hit (A3909), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (A3909). A3910). In the present embodiment, the random number value of the big hit is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). When the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (result of A3910 is “Y”), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3901 (A3911), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. If the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (result of A3910 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing (A3805, A3906) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing, the big hit flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets an outlier (other than the big hit) as the determination result (A4007), and ends the big hit determination processing. I do.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability is present (A4003). If the special figure is in the high probability (the result of A4003 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability set value is set (A4004). On the other hand, when the special figure is not in the high probability (result of A4003 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4005).

  When the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), the judgment result is set to be out (other than the big hit) (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “N”), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination processing (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting processing and the like will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the small hit determination process. Note that the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). Note that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or smaller than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred.

  Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the above-described big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure change display game becoming a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the small hit determination. However, a configuration in which a unique small hit random number is provided is also possible.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a loss as the determination result (A4103), and ends the small hit determination processing. .

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. Is determined (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is “Y”), a loss is set as the judgment result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is “N”), a small hit is set as the judgment result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
FIGS. 25 (a), (b) and (c) show the special figure change display game determined as a result of the above-described big hit determination processing (FIG. 23), small hit determination processing (FIG. 24), and fall lottery processing (FIG. 20). 3 is a table illustrating a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a falling probability of the game.

  In the example of FIG. 25A, the jackpot probability (high probability state) in the high probability state is the same regardless of the probability setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, the jackpot probability (low-probability state) in the low-probability state tends to increase as the probability set value increases (becomes higher), and the larger the probability set value is, the more likely it is that a big hit occurs and the player This is advantageous. As described above, only one of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 23 by the range of the big hit random number. The jackpot probability can be changed in accordance with the probability set value by changing the range of the lower limit judgment value or the value of the jackpot random number in addition to the upper limit judgment value in accordance with the probability set value.

  Also, in setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, or setting 5 and setting 6, the big hit probability (high probability state) and the big hit probability (low probability state) are the same. Note that the jackpot probabilities may be different from each other in all settings. Further, even if the jackpot probability is the same, the effect control device 300 can execute an effect according to each probability setting value (variable effect setting process described later).

  In the example of FIG. 25B, the small hit probability is constant irrespective of the high probability state or the low probability state, and irrespective of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit judgment value and the small hit lower limit judgment value in FIG. 24 by the range of the big hit random number. As shown in FIG. 14, no small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (the small hit probability is zero). A configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game is also possible.

  In the example of FIG. 25C, the falling probability as the winning probability of the falling lottery does not depend on the probability setting value (setting), regardless of whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state, and It is constant (1/237) regardless of whether the game is the one-variation display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. The falling probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the falling lottery upper limit judgment value and the falling lottery lower limit judgment value in FIG. 20 by the range of the value of the falling lottery random number.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (A3606a) in the special figure 1 change start processing will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A4201). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4201 is "Y"), a big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4202). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4203), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4204). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4205), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (A4207). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state (with or without time saving) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end processing and the special figure 2 big hit end processing described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area of the RWM (A4208), and wins the big prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area of the RWM (A4209). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of Step A4212. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4201 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of a miss in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (A4210), Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4211). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of Step A4212.

  After steps A4209 and A4211, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A4212). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4213). Thereby, the decorative special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4214), and clears the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4215). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (A3606b) in the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A4301). When the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4301 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4302). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4303), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4304). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (A4307). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state (with or without time saving) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end processing and the special figure 2 big hit end processing described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area of the RWM (A4308), and wins the big prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is obtained and saved in the RWM special figure 2 big winning opening opening information area (A4309). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of Step A4317. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4301 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is stored in the small hit flag 2 area. It is determined whether the data has been saved (A4310). If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4310 is “Y”), the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4311). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4312), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (A4313). By this processing, the type of the specific result is selected. Subsequently, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4314). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of Step A4317.

  When the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4310 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the miss in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (A4315), and Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4316). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of Step A4317.

  After steps A4309, A4314, and A4316, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command in the decorative special figure 2 command area as an effect command (A4317). ). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4318). The decorative special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319), and clears the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) to 0 (A4320). ), And clears the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A4321). After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

  As described above, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 change display game as the change display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning opening 36, and detects the game ball by the normal change winning device 37. And a variable display game executing means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game as the variable display game based on. In addition, the game control device 100 forms a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Example of special map jackpot pattern distribution]
FIG. 28 is a table exemplifying the distribution of the big hit type (big hit symbol distribution) of the special figure 1 and the variable display game controlled by the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is. It should be noted that the type of jackpot is common to each setting (each probability setting value).

  FIG. 28 exemplifies a table defining the types of jackpots corresponding to the jackpot stop symbol numbers obtained in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process and the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process, and their distribution rates. In the example of FIG. 28, the types of the big hits are 10R certain big hits, 4R certain big hits, and 10R normal big hits (100 times of saving time) common to the special figure 1 and the variable display game. In addition, a 10R normal big hit (0 times of saving time) may be provided.

  In addition, the distribution rate of the 10R probable big hit, the 4R probable big hit, and the 10R normal big hit (100 time savings) is 30%, 30%, 40% in the special figure 1 variable display game, and in the special figure 2 variable display game. The difference is 50%, 10%, and 40%. Note that the distribution ratio can be changed as appropriate.

[Special figure 1 information setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting processing (A3607a) in the special figure 1 change start processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a fluctuation pattern selection information table (A4401). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

  Here, the first half offset data (variation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second half fluctuation. The first half variation is a variation mode before the start of the reach, and the second half variation is a variation mode after the reach state, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is “N”). ), The special figure 1 reservation number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value in order to sort the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 reservation number (A4404). Then, the flow shifts to the process of Step A4405.

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates and converts the first half offset data acquired in step A4402 without performing the process of step A4404. Instead, the flow shifts to the process of Step A4405.

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (the fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and stores the second half offset data (the fluctuation distribution information 2) in the RWM fluctuation distribution. The information is saved in the information 2 area (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 information setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 information setting processing (A3607b) in the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in the low-probability state and is in a state without time saving (a state without ordinary power support), that is, in the special figure low probability & without time saving (normal game (A4501). If the special figure low probability & time saving is not being performed (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A4505.

  If the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (A4501 is "N"), that is, if the time saving state or the probable change state is in effect, the special figure change display game to be started from now on ends. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation (A4502). The time reduction final variation is the last (for example, the 100th) special figure variation display game in the time reduction state. If the special figure change display game to be started is the time-change final change (the result of A4502 is “Y”), the process shifts to the process of step A4506.

  When the special figure change display game to be started is not the time reduction final change (the result of A4502 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a change pattern selection information table (A4503). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first half offset data (variation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation. .

  On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure change display game to be started is the high probability final change. (A4505). Here, the high-probability final change is a special figure change display game when the player falls in the normal lottery state (low-probability state) from the certain change state (high-probability state) by winning the drop lottery (FIG. 20).

  The game control device 100 determines whether the special figure change display game to be started is a high-probability final change (the result of A4505 is “Y”) or a time-reduction final change (the result of A4502 is “Y”). )) In order to secure time for notifying that it is the final variation, the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final variation are set (A4506), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A4511.

  When the special figure change display game to be started is not the high probability final change (the result of A4505 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 change display game is a big hit ( A4507). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (result of A4507 is "N"), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4508), and the process of step A4510 Move to When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big figure of the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game has a long-time fluctuation (long fluctuation).

  In the probable change state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, since the latter half offset data for the long time change of the special figure 2 change display game is not set, the special figure 2 change display game has a normal change time ( Short fluctuation compared to long fluctuation). As a result, a small hit RUSH (rush) state where small hits frequently occur in the special figure 2 change display game is possible in the probability change state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state.

  After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4511), and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2). ) Is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting processing ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change pattern setting processing (A3609a) in the special figure 1 change start processing will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a fluctuating group address table (A4601a), obtains and prepares an address of the latter half fluctuating group table corresponding to the fluctuating distribution information 2, and prepares (A4602a) the fluctuating pattern random number of the special figure 1. A variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared as a random number from one storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4603a).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss (A4604a). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (the result of A4604a is “Y”), a 2-byte distribution process based on the random number 1 of the change pattern is executed (A4605a), and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order. If not (a big hit or a small hit) (result of A4604a is "N"), a distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606a). Note that the 2-byte distribution process and the distribution process are processes for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  Note that the structure of the second half fluctuation group table is different for hit and miss, and the random number for sorting is 1 byte size for hit and 2 byte size for hit. The hit is set to 1 byte in order to save the data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate itself of the special figure 1 variable display game is low. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the variation pattern random number 1 is used.

  After step A4605a or A4606a, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the second half change selection table obtained as a result of the sorting (A4607a). Subsequently, a variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608a), and a distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609a). . Then, the second-half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and saved in the second-half variation number area (A4610a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the second-half variation number (second-half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second-half variation selection table (second-half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611a), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612a). Subsequently, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4613a). Further, a variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the special figure 1 (A4614a), and a distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the first half variation number (first half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

  Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4616a), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

  With the above processing, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing (A3609b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing is the same as the processing of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing (FIG. 31) except that “special figure 1” is replaced with “special figure 2”. , And a detailed description will be omitted. Steps A4601b to A4616b in the special figure 2 change pattern setting process correspond to steps A4601a to A4616a in the special figure 1 change pattern setting process, respectively.

  With the above processing, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, the details of the change start information setting processing (A3610a, A3610b) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the change start information setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 used (A5001).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a first half fluctuation time value table (A5002) and acquires a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5003). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (A5004), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is acquired (A5005).

  Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (A5006), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). Next, it is determined whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5008). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5008 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the long change (long time change) of the special figure 2 variable display game Is determined (A5009).

  When the long variation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not started (the result of A5009 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5010). When the long fluctuation of the two-variation display game is started (the result of A5009 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5011). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variable display game, the predetermined number of repetitions (here 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to the number of repetitions in order to cause the variation of the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) which is not enough with the 2-byte timer. Set to the area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt period of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can set up to about 262 seconds.

  For example, when a timer of 60,000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of repetitions is saved nine times, the timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2 The timer is decremented in the game processing (FIG. 15) (A3304), and when the time is up (the result of A3305 is “Y”), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3307), and the long fluctuation timer is added to the game processing timer. The value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set again (A3308). As a result, the special figure 2 change display game with a long change can have a long change time of 60000 msec + (60000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

  The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case where the fluctuation is not long (the number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuation time saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the second half fluctuation time value.

  When information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5012 without setting the number of times of repetition of the timer.

  After steps A5008, A5010, and A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a change command (MODE) corresponding to the first half change number (A5012), and prepares a change command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half change number (A5013). . Then, an effect command setting process for transmitting the fluctuation command as an effect command is executed (A5014).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and changes the special figure fluctuations of the target. The contents of the random number storage area relating to the display game are shifted (A5016), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5017). Then, the change start information setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. Fluctuating commands including information on patterns are given, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Time reduction fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time reduction change frequency update processing (A3611a, A3611b) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the time reduction variation count update process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (during the probability change state) (A5101). When the special figure high probability flag (in the present embodiment, the special figure high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure high probability is in progress (result of A5101 is “Y”), the time reduction fluctuation count update processing ends.

  When the special figure high probability is not in effect (the result of A5101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (time reduction state) (A5102). When a flag with a time reduction (in the present embodiment, a low probability & time reduction flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure time reduction is in progress. If it is not during the special figure time reduction (the result of A5102 is “N”), the time reduction variation number update processing is ended.

  The game control device 100 updates the number of times of the time reduction fluctuation by -1 (subtracts by 1) when it is during the special figure time reduction (the state of the special figure has a low probability and the general electricity support is present) (the result of A5102 is "Y"). ) (A5103). Note that the initial value of the number of times of time reduction fluctuation is the number of fluctuations in which the time saving state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 100 times (big hit end setting processing 2 described later). Also, regardless of which of the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change display game starts changing, the time reduction change number is updated by -1.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of times of time reduction fluctuation is 0 (A5104). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5104 is “N”), that is, if the time reduction state continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 updates the number of time reduction fluctuations. The process ends. When the number of times of the time reduction change is 0 (the result of A5104 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the time reduction in the external information output data area (A5105). Here, the signal relating to the end of the working hours is off signal of two big hits. As a result, a signal regarding the end of the working hours is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5106). The signal relating to the end of time saving here is, for example, off data of a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, off data of a special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, off data of a normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, a normal motor combination. This is off data of the object 1 open extension state signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the gaming state display number area (A5107), and saves the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag in the RWM special figure game mode flag area (A5108). Then, the flag for saving time-saving time is saved in the flag-mode flag mode area (A5109).

  As described above, by executing the time reduction fluctuation count update process in the second embodiment, the normal game state (the special figure low probability and the normal figure low probability and the special figure low probability (Without electrical support).

[Processing during special figure 1 fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the symbol determination number output number by +1 (A5301). The number of times of symbol determination output is used in a symbol determination frequency signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) for outputting a symbol determination frequency signal generated when a stop symbol of the special figure variation display game is determined to an external device. Is done. Next, the decorative special figure 1 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepared as an effect command (A5302), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 change display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 as a display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a symbol out of the special pattern 1 and 2000 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol of the special symbol 1.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 change display game is a loss (the result of A5307 is “Y”), the information saved in the above-described special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (the stop symbol number at the time of the loss) is the special figure 1 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322).

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is “N”), the special figure 2 is also changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed). It is determined whether or not (A5308). If the special figure 2 is not fluctuating (the result of A5308 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A5319. If the special figure 2 is also fluctuating (the result of A5308 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the processing for displaying the special figure 2 described below is being executed (A5309).

  When the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the game control device 100 causes the process to proceed to step A5311. When the special figure 2 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5309 is “N”), the number of times of outputting the symbol determination times is updated by +1 (A5310). Subsequently, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (A5311), and displayed in the game processing timer area of the special figure 2 Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of the timer interrupt processing. 4 msec is added because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3304), and thus is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special symbol 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 can be equalized. If the stop display of the special figure 2 has already been started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but may be shortened in some cases).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the design symbol command of the decorative special figure 2 as an effect command (A5313), saves it in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A5314), and executes the effect command setting process (A5314). A5315). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5317). After that, a special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 for performing setting for executing the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 display process shift setting processing 2, processing for saving the processing number “2” in the special figure 2 game processing number area or stopping the special figure 2 variable display game with a loss result is executed.

  By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, in the special figure 1 changing display processing, which is the control related to the special figure 1 changing display game, the outlier of the special figure 2 changing display game (including the decoration special figure 2 changing display game) is set. The execution of the special figure 2 displaying process (end of the special figure 2 variable display game) is set. As described above, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (while the special figure 2 is changing), if the special figure 1 variable display game results in a hit (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is lost. As a result, the fluctuation is forcibly terminated (forcibly terminated).

  The special figure 1 changing process is performed when the variable time ends, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) times out (A3206). Since the result is executed in “Y”), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended (forced end).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit information is loaded from the aforementioned special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A5320). The winning opening information is loaded and saved in the winning opening information area (A5321). Thereafter, the information (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) saved in the above-described special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1 for setting to execute the special figure 1 display processing is executed (A5323), and the special figure 1 changing processing ends. In the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 1, the special figure 1 is displayed, such as saving the processing number “2” in the special figure 1 game processing number area or executing processing to stop the special figure 1 variable display game. Perform the necessary processing to shift to the processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 forms the stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, even if the special control 2 variable display game is being executed (while the special control 2 is changing), the special control 2 variable display game is lost if the special control 1 variable display game results in a hit. A forced termination means for forcibly terminating the result is provided.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the symbol determination number output number by +1 (A5401). The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in a symbol determination frequency signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs a symbol determination frequency signal generated when a stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to an external device. . Next, the decorative special figure 2 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepared as an effect command (A5402), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5403). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 change display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 as a display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is the off symbol of the special figure 2, 600 msec if it is the big hit symbol of the special figure 2, and 136 msec if it is the small hit symbol of the special figure 2. is there. In addition, the display time of the outlying symbol and the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same, but is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss (the result of A5407 is “Y”), the information saved in the above-described special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (the stop symbol number at the time of the loss) is the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not wrong (the result of A5407 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed). Is determined (A5408). If the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A5408 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A5423. If the special figure 1 is also fluctuating (the result of A5408 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 fluctuating display game is a big hit (A5409).

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5409 is “N”), that is, if it is a small hit, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 game interruption flag (A5412). Then, an ornament special figure 1 interruption command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5414). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of Step A5423. As described above, even when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (while the special figure 1 is changing), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special figure 1 game. The interruption of the measurement of the fluctuation time by the processing timer is interrupted. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 1 interrupted after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game ends. The variable display game can be restarted.

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a special figure 1 displaying process to be described later is being executed ( A5410). When the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5410 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of step A5415. When the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed (result of A5410 is “N”), the number of times of output of the number of times of symbol determination is updated by +1 (A5411). Subsequently, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2 + 4 msec) is set as the display time of the special figure 1 (A5415) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. The time is saved (A5416). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of the timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interruption period) in the next special figure 1 game processing (A3205), and thus is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of the special figure 1 has already been started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but may be shortened in some cases).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares a design symbol command of the decorative special figure 1 as an effect command (A5417), saves it in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A5418), and executes an effect command setting process (A5418). A5419). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 change display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5421). Thereafter, a special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 for setting for executing the special figure 1 display processing is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display process shift setting processing 2, processing for saving the processing number “2” in the special figure 1 game processing number area or stopping the special figure 1 variable display game as a result of a loss is executed.

  By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, in the special figure 2 changing display processing, which is the control related to the special figure 2 changing display game, the outlier of the special figure 1 changing display game (including the decoration special figure 1 changing display game) is set. The execution of the special figure 1 displaying process (end of the special figure 1 variable display game) is set. As described above, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (while the special figure 1 is changing), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly generated with a loss result. (The execution ends).

  The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the time of the special figure 2 game processing timer expires (the results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed in “Y”), the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (executed) when the special figure 2 variable display game resulting from the hit stops changing.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). When the result of the special figure 2 change display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is “Y”), the information saved in the above-described special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (the stop symbol number at the time of the small hit) is the special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (a large hit) (result of A5424 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the aforementioned special figure 2 round number upper limit information area. The value information is loaded and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A5425),
The special winning opening information is loaded from the special drawing 2 special opening information area and saved in the special opening information area (A5426). Then, the information (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) saved in the above-described special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1 for setting for executing the special figure 2 display processing is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 changing processing ends. In the special figure 2 display process shift setting processing 1, the special figure 2 is displayed, such as saving the processing number "2" in the special figure 2 game processing number area or executing processing to stop the special figure 2 variable display game. Perform the necessary processing to shift to the processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 forms the stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Even if the special control 1 variable display game is being executed (while the special control 1 is changing), the game control device 100 loses the special control 1 change display game if the special control 2 variable display game results in a hit. A forced termination means for forcibly terminating the result is provided.

[Processing while displaying special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3212) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 displaying process.

  First, the game control device 100 loads a big hit flag 1 (indicating big hit information or loss information) from the big hit flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the big hit flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5703).

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5704). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal and the ON data of the special symbol 1 hit signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5705), and executes an effect command setting process (A5706). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5708).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability in the external information output data area (A5709). The signals here include two big hits of ON data (ON signal) and three big hits of ON data (ON signal). In this embodiment, there is no 2R jackpot because there is no 2R jackpot. However, two jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability jackpot during the low probability, and three signals may be turned off in the 2R probability jackpot during the high probability. May be.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5710), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5711).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets “3” as the process number to shift to the fanfare / interval process (A5712), saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5713), and sets the fanfare. / Processing during mid-interval processing transition setting processing is executed (A5714), and the processing for displaying special figure 1 ends.

  In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, processing for transitioning to the fanfare / interval processing is executed. More specifically, as a signal relating to the start of the big hit, one big hit signal ON data (ON signal) and four big hit signals ON data (ON signal) are saved in the external information output data area. Also, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area, and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Further, the time reduction fluctuation frequency area for retaining the time reduction fluctuation frequency is cleared. Also, the round number area is cleared to zero.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit) (the result of A5703 is “N”), that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is In the case of a loss, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 change display game executed this time is a high probability final change (A5715). The high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game in a case where the player has won the falling lottery (FIG. 20). If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A5715 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time is the time reduction final fluctuation (A5716). The time reduction final variation is the last (for example, the 100th) special figure variation display game in the time reduction state. If it is not the time reduction final variation (the result of A5716 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A5724.

  When the game control device 100 determines that the final change is a high-probability final change (the result of A5715 is “Y”) or the time-reduction final change (the result of A5716 is “Y”), the probability information command (low Is prepared as an effect command (A5717), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5718). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (A5719), and the left-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (A5720). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5721). When the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game is reached (the result of A5721 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A5724.

  When the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game is not the small hit state (the result of A5721 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the left-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A5722). Subsequently, in order to turn off the second game state display unit 56 (the lamps D8 to D10) that informs that it is right-handed, a left-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5723). Then, the special figure status area is cleared while the special figure 1 is being changed (information subtraction) (A5724). Thereafter, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 1 normal processing to shift to the special figure 1 normal processing, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is set. The processing number is saved (A5725). Then, the special figure 1 displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3314) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 38A and 38B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special figure 2 displaying process. FIG. 38A shows the first half of the special figure 2 displaying process, and FIG. 38B shows the latter half of the special figure 2 displaying process.

  The game control device 100 first loads a small hit flag 2 (indicating small hit information or missing information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801) and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 (indicating big hit information or loss information) is loaded from the big hit flag 2 area (A5803), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal and the ON data of the special symbol 2 hit signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5807), and executes an effect command setting process (A5808). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5809), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5810).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability in the external information output data area (A5811). The signal here includes ON data of two big hits and ON data of three big hits. In this embodiment, there is no 2R jackpot because there is no 2R jackpot. However, two jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability jackpot during the low probability, and three signals may be turned off in the 2R probability jackpot during the high probability. May be.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5812), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5813). Then, "3" is set as the processing number to shift to the processing during the fanfare / interval (A5814).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5815), executes the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (A5816), and ends the special figure 2 displaying processing. . The fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 displaying processing.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is “N”), the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. It is determined whether or not the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (A5817). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5817 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time is the high probability final change (A5818). If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A5818 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time is the time reduction final fluctuation (A5819). When it is not the time shortening final fluctuation (the result of A5819 is “N”), the process shifts to the process of step A5824 without performing the processes of steps A5820 to A5823.

  When the special figure 2 change display game executed this time is the high probability final change (the result of A5818 is “Y”) or the time reduction final change is performed (the result of A5819 is “Y )), A probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is prepared as an effect command (A5820), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5821).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5822), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A5823). After that, the winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area to prepare as an effect command (A5824), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5825). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5826), and executes an effect command setting process (A5827). Then, the signal relating to the right-handing instruction (ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5828), and the second gaming state display unit 56 (ramp D8- In order to light D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5829).

  Next, in the present embodiment, since the lower winning a prize mouth is opened with a small hit in the present embodiment, the lower winning prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (A5830), and the lower prize winning illegal monitoring period flag area is cleared. Then, the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved (A5831), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting processing is executed (A5832), and the special figure 2 displaying processing ends. Although the big winning opening is opened at the small hit, the screen of the display device 41 does not need to be changed.

  In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing, processing for shifting to the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing is executed. Specifically, "7" is set as the process number in order to shift to the small hit fanfare middle process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area. Also, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, and a signal related to the start of the small hit (one big hit signal ON data) is saved in the external information output data area. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hits (on data of the special symbol 2 small hits signal) is saved in the test signal output data area, and the small hit information is saved in the special figure status area.

  On the other hand, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5817 is “N”), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game Is negative, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time is the high probability final fluctuation (A5833). If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A5833 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time is the time reduction final fluctuation (A5834). When it is not the time reduction final variation (the result of A5834 is “N”), the process shifts to the process of step A5840 without performing the processes of steps A5835 to A5839.

  When the game control device 100 is the high-probability final change (the result of A5833 is “Y”) or the time-reduction final change (the result of A5834 is “Y”), the probability control command (low-probability) Is prepared as an effect command (A5835), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5836). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (A5837), and the signal related to the left-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area in order to turn off the second game state display unit 56 (the lamps D8 to D10) that informs that it is right-handed. Is saved (A5839) and the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5840). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, “0” is set as the processing number of the special figure 2 normal processing to shift to the special figure 2 normal processing, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is set. The processing number is saved (A5841). Then, the special figure 2 displaying process ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 39A and FIG. 39B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special fluctuation winning devices 38 and 39 is 0 (A6001). If the remaining sphere counter is not 0 (result of A6001 is “N”), the processing during the fanfare / interval ends. When the remaining ball counter is 0 (result of A6001 is “Y”). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first jackpot round (the result of A6002 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A6010.

  In the case of the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a game ball has passed at the general-purpose starting gate 34 (A6003). If there is no passing of the game ball at the normal figure starting gate 34 (result of A6003 is "N"), the processing during the fanfare / interval is ended. In other words, the process does not shift to the process related to the big hit (the process of opening the special winning opening, etc.) until the game ball passes the general-purpose starting gate 34 after the right-handed start.

  The game control device 100 sets the information on the start of the big hit when the game ball has passed at the ordinary figure starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is “Y”), that is, when the right-handed start is started. Execute (A6004-A6009). First, a round number upper limit table is set (A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit information area is obtained from the round number upper limit value table, and the RWM round number upper limit value area is obtained. (A6005). In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds is 10R and 4R.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit value table, and saves it in the RWM round LED pointer area (A6006). In the present embodiment, since the big winning prize mouth is opened at the big hit, the upper winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (A6007), and the unauthorized monitoring outside flag is set in the RWM upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (A6008), and the ON output data of the in-operation of the accessory continuous operating device is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the round number area by +1 (A6010). Note that the round number in the round number area has been cleared to 0 in the fanfare / inter-interval processing shift setting processing, and thus has been set to 0 before the start of the current big hit operation. After that, a round command corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6011), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6012).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the special jackpot processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves it in the large hit processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, in the case of a pattern in which the opening and closing of the special winning opening is repeated during one round, 0 is set as an initial value, and in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once during one round, the initial value is set as an upper limit. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing are repeated, the initial value is not necessarily 0, but may be a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value (that is, starting from an intermediate value). Next, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round for operating the lever solenoid 86b for opening the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6016). In the present embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is the big hit round 1 (the first big hit round).

  When it is the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017). Here, a lever solenoid is opened so as to open the specific area 86 in a long time in the case of a probability change big hit (10R or 4R probability change big hit) and in a short time (very short time) in the case of a normal big hit (10R normal big hit). The operation data of 86b is set. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to zero. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (result of A6016 is “N”), stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets “4” as the process number in order to shift to the special winning opening process (A6019), and determines whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A6019). A6020). If the special game 1 is a big hit of the variable display game (the result of A6020 is “Y”), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the special winning opening opening time is set in the special figure 1 game processing. The data is saved in the timer area (A6022). If the special figure 1 is not a big hit of the variable display game (the result of A6020 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the special winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. It is saved in the area (A6024).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal (ON data of the special motor-operated accessory 1 operating signal) relating to the start of the opening of the big winning opening in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the big winning opening solenoid of the RWM. In the data area, the upper winning port solenoid valve 39b (large winning port solenoid 2) is turned on, the upper winning port ON data is saved (A6026), the large winning port count number is cleared (A6027), and processing during fanfare / interval is performed. To end.

  In the present embodiment, there is only a big hit that opens only the big win, but two types of big hits that open only the big win and a big hit that opens only the lower win may be provided, It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper winning prize port and the lower winning prize port.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 big hit end processing (A3216) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing.

  The game control device 100 first executes a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data (A6101). If the time reduction determination data is data without a time reduction, the big hit end setting processing 1 is executed to shift to the normal gaming state after the big hit is completed (A6102). The big hit end setting process 2 is executed to shift to the time saving state after the end (A6103).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6104). As described above, in the jackpot round 1 (the first jackpot round) in the case of the probability change big hit (10R or 4R probability change hit), the specific area 86 is opened for a long time (A6017), and the specific area switch 72 is set to the specific area. The passing of the game ball to the 86 (V winning) is almost certainly detected (regular passing of a specific area). Then, when the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is received, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passing information indicating that the game ball has passed to the specific area 86 (V winning) in the RAM. is there.

  In addition, even in the big hit round 1 in the case of the normal big hit (10R normal big hit), the specific area 86 is opened for a very short time, but the specific area switch 72 is set to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). In some cases, passage (V winning) can be detected (irregular passage in a specific area). Also in this case, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information in the RAM.

  When there is no specific area passage information (result of A6104 is “N”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A6106. On the other hand, when there is the specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is “Y”), the big hit end setting process 3 is executed to shift to the probability change state (probability change state) after the big hit end (A6105). In this case, the data set in the big hit end setting process 3 is overwritten on the data set in the big hit end setting processes 1 and 2, and the data set in the big hit end setting processes 1 and 2 are invalidated. Become.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads the probability information command from the power failure restoration transmission command area (A6106). In the big hit end setting process 1-3, a probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a low-probability or high-probability probability state or a time saving state is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there has been a specific area irregular passage (A6107). As described above, the specific area irregular passage (specific area abnormal passage) means that a game ball passes through the specific area 86 in a normal big hit, and the specific area regular passage (specific area normal passage) In the case of a probability change big hit, the game ball passes through the specific area 86. For example, if the specific area passage information is generated in the case of a normal big hit, it can be determined that the specific area irregular passage has occurred. It should be noted that, not only when a specific area is regularly passed but also when a specific area is irregularly passed, the state shifts to the probability change state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit.

  When a specific area is irregularly passed (result of A6107 is “Y”), the game control device 100 adds the irregular probability information to the loaded probability information command (A6108), and outputs the probability information. An effect command setting process is performed to set the command as an effect command (A6109). On the other hand, when there is no specific area irregular passage (result of A6107 is “N”), an effect command setting process is performed so as to set the loaded probability information command as an effect command as it is (A6109).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number in order to return to the normal processing of the special figure 1 (A6110), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6111). Then, a signal relating to the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (A6112). The signals relating to the end of the big hit here are one big hit signal off data and three big hit signals off data.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6113). The signal relating to the end of the big hit is, for example, off data of the condition device operating signal, off data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, off data of the special symbol 1 signal, and off data of the special symbol 2 signal. It is.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A6114). Subsequently, the flag during the improper monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award opening improper monitoring period flag area (A6115), and the special figure status area is cleared (A6116). Thereafter, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6117), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

  The special figure 2 game wait time value is used to determine whether the forcible termination of the special figure 2 variable display game starts to change (the special figure 2 usual processing during the special figure 2 game processing) and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7). It is set to delay sometimes. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec which is twice as long as the interrupt cycle (that is, 2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

  If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game processing (A1313 in FIG. 7) performed immediately after the special figure 1 big hit end processing is executed. At A1314 in FIG. 7, the determination of the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game starts (starts in the current timer interrupt process). It may be problematic to start first. Note that the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and thus remains at 0. Therefore, the determination of the start of the change of the special figure 1 change display game is performed in the next timer interrupt processing (the special figure 1 usual processing during the special figure 1 game processing).

  The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice as long as the interruption period (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game processing immediately after the current special figure 1 game processing (starts in the current timer interrupt processing). This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease by 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decreased by 4 msec) to 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 variable display game Is determined (special figure 2 usual processing during special figure 2 game processing). Thus, in the next timer interrupt processing after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the determination of the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure If the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can simultaneously start changing. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the state of the big hit, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped at an outlier symbol (forcibly terminated or originally not changed).

  If the special figure 2 variable display game starts before the special figure 1 variable display game after the big hit state, if there is no particular problem with the game control, the process of step A6717 is omitted and the special figure 2 variable display game is skipped. FIG. 2 The game wait time value need not be set.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 big hit end processing (A3318) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing.

  Steps A6201 to A6216 of the special figure 2 big hit end processing are the same as those in steps A6101 to A6116 of the special figure 1 big hit end processing except that "special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2". Since the same processing as steps A6101 to A6116 is performed, detailed description is omitted.

  It is not necessary to provide a special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end processing. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain at 0. In the next timer interrupt processing, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game starts. (In the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing), and if the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change display game start changing simultaneously. That's because you can.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting processing 1 (A6102, A6202) in the special figure 1 and big hit end processing will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of no time saving state (no time saving) in the external information output data area (A6301). Here, the signal related to the start without the time saving state is the off data of two signals of the big hit. The signal related to the start without the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302). Here, the signal relating to the start without the time saving state is the off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the off data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation. These are the off data of the time reduction state signal, the off data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the off data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without the time reduction state in the game state display number area (A6303), saves the flag in the normal figure game mode flag area in the normal figure game time flag area (A6304), and displays the special figure game. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the mode flag area (A6305). The no-figure time-saving flag indicates that the time-reduction fluctuating state of the fuji-figure display game is not in the time reduction state (the time reduction state, the normal power support state). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the jackpot probability is low and not in the time saving state (general power support state).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 clears the time shortening change frequency area to 0 (A6306), and saves a signal related to the left-handing instruction (for example, off data of the firing position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6307). . Then, in order to turn off the right-displayed LED (first gaming state display unit 57), the left-handed state number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A6308), and the power failure restoration transmission command area is stored in the transmission command area. The probability information command (low probability) indicating the low probability is saved (A6309), and the big hit end setting process 1 ends.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the big hit end setting processing 2 (A6103, A6203) in the special figure 1 and big hit end processing will be described in detail. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area (A6501). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time saving is two signals of big hits on data. Note that the ON data of the two jackpots is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the fanfare of the jackpot (A5709, A5811), and the ON data of the two jackpot signals continues from the external information terminal 71 during the big hit. Eventually, it is output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the time reduction state (with time reduction) in the test signal output data area (A6502). Here, the signal related to the start of the time reduction state includes the off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the on data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation. The ON data of the time shortening state signal, the ON data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the ON data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time reduction state in the game state display number area (A6503), saves the flag with the general figure time reduction in the general figure game mode flag area (A6504), and displays the special figure game. The special figure low probability & time saving flag is saved in the mode flag area (A6505). The flag indicating that there is a time reduction flag in the normal figure indicates that the time reduction fluctuation state (the time reduction state, the normal power support state) of the general figure change display game is set. The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and the time saving state (general power support state).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value (for example, 100) in the time shortening change frequency area for storing the time shortening fluctuation number (A6506), and sets the probability of indicating that it is in the time reduction state in the power failure restoration transmission command area. The information command (time saving) is saved (A6507), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends.

  In addition, since the right-handed state is advantageous in the right-handed state from the big hit state, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 3 (A6105, A6205) in the special figure 1 and big hit end processes will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 3.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area (A6801). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time saving is two signals of big hits on data. Note that the ON data of the two jackpots is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the fanfare of the jackpot (A5709, A5811), and the ON data of the two jackpot signals continues from the external information terminal 71 during the big hit. Eventually, it is output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the high probability & time reduction in the test signal output data area (A6802). Here, the signal relating to the start of the high probability and the shortening of time is the ON data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the ON data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the ON data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol. 2 is ON data of a fluctuation time reduction state signal.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time saving state in the gaming state display number area (A6803), and saves the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6804). The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the jackpot probability is high and the time saving state (in this case, the time reduction change of the special figure change display game is executed).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the right-handing instruction (for example, ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6805). Then, in order to light the display LED during the right-handed operation (the first game state display unit 57), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6806), and the number is transmitted to the power failure restoration transmission command area. The probability information command (high probability) indicating the high probability is saved (A6807), and the big hit end setting process 3 ends.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3319) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the small hit fanfare middle processing.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a small-hit winning opening command for opening the lower big winning opening as an effect command (A6901), and executes an effect command setting process (A6902). Next, “8” is set as the processing number (A6903), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6904), and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the lower large winning opening. The special figure 2 is saved in the game processing timer area (A6905).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the small hitting operation (ON data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6906), and saves the signal in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. The lower winning award opening data is saved (A6907). As a result, in the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the lower large winning opening (the first special variable winning device 38) is opened.

  Next, the game control device 100 clears the special winning opening count number area storing the count number (the number of detections) of the special winning opening count switch (lower special winning opening switch 38a and / or upper special winning opening switch 39a). (A6908), and ends the small hit fanfare middle processing.

  In the present embodiment, there is only the small hit opening pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once, but there may be a small hit opening pattern in which the opening and closing of the special winning opening is repeated. Also, by setting "8" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hitting medium processing after the small hit fanfare medium processing ends.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing (A3322) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing.

  The game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number in order to return to the normal processing of the special figure 2 (A7301), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Subsequently, the signal relating to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the flag during the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area. (A7304). Further, the number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7305), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7306).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is in the low probability state and in the state without time saving (the state without ordinary power support), that is, in the special figure low probability & medium time saving (normally) (A7307). When the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (during normal game state) (result of A7307 is "N"), the processing in step A7310 and thereafter is executed.

  The game control device 100, when the special figure is low probability and no time saving is in progress (during the normal game state) (result of A7307 is "Y"), outputs a signal related to the left-handing instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1). The game data is saved in the test signal output data area (A7308), the left-handed state number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A7309), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (A7309). A7310).

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the result of A7310 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (A7311) and executes the effect command setting process. (A7312). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A7310 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared without preparing the decoration special figure 1 restart command (A7313), and the special figure 2 End small hit end processing

  For the same reason as in the special figure 2 big hit end processing (FIG. 41), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit end processing.

[Control of production control device]
Hereinafter, the control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 using the effect control program will be described.

[Main processing (effect controller)]
First, details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. Note that, in the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the reference sign (number) of the step is represented as “B ****”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, effect controller 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, a command reception interruption process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 is enabled.

  Next, effect controller 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the power-on initial value is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

  Subsequently, effect controller 300 clears a WDT (watch dock timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B0002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Thereafter, effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from RTC (real-time clock) 338 as a clock unit (B0009).

  In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process proceeds to step B0009. In addition, the configuration may be such that the RTC reading process is executed only once when the power to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, when the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on) (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). And B0004). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined period or only once when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. Then, effect control device 300 may execute various processes using a time timer instead of RTC 338. By doing so, the number of times of reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 can be reduced.

  In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), a predetermined effect may be executed. By randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability according to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the lottery may be selected so that the selection rate at a long time interval becomes smaller as the set value is larger. Further, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by performing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, a lottery may be selected so that the selection rate of a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. An effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for receiving operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by a person in charge of a game arcade (game store) or a player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs an effect point control process of adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, the production points are added by performing a production or operation that is the target of production point addition, and at the end of a game, for example, at the end of a game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by randomly selecting a value (added value) to be added to the effect point with a probability according to the set value. For example, lottery may be performed so that the selectivity of a large addition value increases as the set value increases.

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes a received command received from game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41 or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. An effect display editing process is performed (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the rendering preparation to the display frame buffer is completed, and the rendering command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

  Subsequently, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 An instruction to draw a screen is issued (B0018). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame switching is performed, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (１ ／ of the frame period). . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 second.

  Further, effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from speaker 19 (B0019).

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) including the LEDs (B0020). In the decoration control processing, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (a board effect device 44, a frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control processing, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

  Then, after finishing the process of B0021 described above, effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check processing (B0014) in the above-described main processing (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a received command check process executed by effect controller 300.

  The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as a command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the number of received commands is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and thus the received command check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “Y”), effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM are copied to a command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, data is not overwritten.

  Then, effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The reception command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read out in the order of the indexes and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if the copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N )), And repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

  When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, the analysis of the received command is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception.

  Subsequently, when the copying is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), effect control device 300 loads the received command content in the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the received command to analyze the content. The processing is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 49. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), and then the processing of step B1101 is performed. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in has been completed (B1110). If the analysis has not been completed (result of B1110 is “N”), the processing of steps B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing ends.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 48) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a received command analysis process performed by effect controller 300.

  First, effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command into a MODE part and the lower byte into an ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE part (MODE command) and an ACTION part (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of the command. You. Therefore, the higher order and lower order of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether the value is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether the value is a value (value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction or the like). If the ACTION section is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the variation command (B1205). The variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special decoration symbol, and includes a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process). If the MODE section indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the range of the hit command (B1207). Note that the hit command is a command for instructing an operation (such as display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to an effect during a hit. For example, a big hit fanfare command (set in the special figure display processing), a round command (fanfare / During interval processing), interval command (setting during special winning opening processing), ending command (setting during special winning opening processing), small hit fanfare command, small hit opening command (small round command), A small hit end screen command (small hit ending command) and the like. If the MODE section indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent a hit-related command (result of B1207 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol-related command (B1209). Note that the symbol-related commands include a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section indicates a symbol command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a symbolic command (result of B1209 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section falls within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE section indicates a one-shot command (the result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is in the range of the prefetching symbol command (B1213). . The look-ahead design related commands include a look-ahead stop design command. If the MODE section indicates a pre-reading symbol-related command (result of B1213 is “Y”), a pre-reading symbol-related command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analyzing process ends. If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is low, the look-ahead symbol command processing is executed using the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability). If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is high, the look-ahead is performed. The pre-reading symbol command processing may be executed using a stop symbol command (low probability).

  If the MODE part does not represent the prefetching symbol command (the result of B1213 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is in the range of the prefetch variable command (B1215). ). The prefetch variation command includes a prefetch variation pattern command. If the MODE section indicates the prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetch variable command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( The result of B1204 is “N”), and the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a single command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot system command process ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (result of B1301 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). If the MODE section indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is "Y"), a RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is performed (B1304), and a single-shot system command process is performed. finish.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is "N"), then effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a power failure restoration command (B1305). ). If the MODE section indicates a power failure recovery command (result of B1305 is “Y”), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the power failure restoration command (result of B1305 is "N"), then effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demonstration command (B1307). . If the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demonstration command (result of B1307 is “Y”), a customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demonstration command (result of B1307 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents the decorative special figure 1 reservation number command. (B1309). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1310), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 1 pending number command (result of B1309 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 pending number command. Is determined (B1311). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1312), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 pending number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE section indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / illegal command (step B1313). B1315). The error / illegal commands include, for example, an illegal occurrence command, an illegal release command, a status off command, and a status on command. As a state ON command, generation of a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and generation of a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame) Release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

  If the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or improper notification is executed (B1316). The one-shot command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), then the mode control unit 300 sets the mode switching command (processing during special figure display). Is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE section indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is "Y"), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not indicate a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit indicates an out-ball number command indicating the number of out-balls. It is determined whether it is not (B1319). If the MODE section indicates the out-ball count command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball count reception process is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the number-of-out-balls command (result of B1319 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a count command (large winning opening count command). Is determined (B1321). Then, when the MODE section indicates the command of the special winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a count command (result of B1321 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a set value information command (probability set value information command). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. If the MODE section indicates the set value information command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is executed (B1324), and the single command processing is terminated. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

  If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command (result of B1323 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). As a command of the setting change system, for example, there is a command (A1030) during the change of the probability setting. If the MODE section indicates a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), a setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change information setting processing, the contents of the setting change type command are stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for changing the probability setting is received, in the setting change information setting process, a display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being changed.

  If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command (result of B1325 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). . As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) during probability setting confirmation. If the MODE section indicates a setting confirmation type command (result of B1327 is “Y”), a setting confirmation type information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot type command processing ends. In the setting confirmation system information setting processing, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for confirming the probability setting is received, in the setting confirmation information setting process, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1329). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of the special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of the special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section command is a normal command ( B1330).

  When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (result of B1330 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets a stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game is performed after all symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single command processing ends. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state. However, depending on the timing at which the present process is executed, the game state flag is changed to the flag of “changed”, “big hit”, “small hit”. Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is "N"), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

  In addition, although not described in FIG. 50, when the MODE unit indicates the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (A5413) or the decoration special figure 1 resuming command (A7311), the effect control device 300 sets the decoration special figure 1 Processing for interrupting and resuming the variable display game may be executed.

[Read-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the look-ahead symbol system command processing (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetching symbol command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest hold information is information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start storage), for example, if the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). When the latest suspension information is the information of the special figure 1 reservation (result of B1601 is “Y”), the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations. Save (B1602).

  If the latest suspension information is not the special figure 1 reservation information (result of B1601 is “N”), effect controller 300 is the decoration special figure reservation number command received most recently is the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. In this case, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension number (B1603).

  After steps B1602 and B1603, effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead variable command (B1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the game control device 100 transmits the pre-reading symbol system command followed by the pre-reading variable system command. After that, the pre-reading symbol command processing ends.

[Prefetch variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, details of the prefetch variation command processing (B1216) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a prefetch variation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch variation command (B1701). When the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the reception of the prefetch variable command is waiting. If the reception of the prefetch variable command is not waiting (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch variable command processing ends. If reception of a prefetch variable command is waiting (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

  Next, effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds in the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest hold information (B1703), The sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part (B1704). Next, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and a sub-prefetch variation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the prefetch variation command is acquired (B1706).

  Next, effect controller 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. When both the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted command composed of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion corresponds to the latest pending information and the number of pending parts. The prefetch variable command area (special figure 1 prefetch variable command area or special figure 2 prefetch variable command area) is saved (B1708). Then, a pre-read command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

  Note that the time of the first half change corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the change starts the change display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, a longer first half change occurs, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, a shorter first half change occurs. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half change is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation command is converted into the sub-prefetching variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

  Further, since the type of the reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-internal prefetching change command ACT unit does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there is also a kind of reach of the same system, if the effect control device 300 uses the ACT part (the value of the latter half variation) of the prefetch variation command as it is without converting it, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. . For example, in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach -1 stop and miss, normal reach +1 stop and miss. Therefore, by converting the ACT units indicating the reach of the same system into the same sub-internal prefetch variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion is not normal (result of B1710 is "N"), it is determined that the converted command is abnormal, and the prefetch variation command processing is terminated.

  If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), effect controller 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the prefetch variable command area. (B1711), a prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). Examples of the look-ahead effect include a continuous notice effect (including a look-ahead effect with a chance), a look-ahead zone effect, a change notice on hold, and the like. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest pending pre-reading effect (preliminary change notification) occurs (B1713). When the latest pending prefetching effect occurs (result of B1713 is “Y”), point information corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1714).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the prefetching effect that occurs (such as a pending change notice) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the generated prefetch effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1716). If the prefetching effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “N”), the display corresponding to the prefetching effect during the hold shift (when the hold display is moved or the number of holds is reduced) is set and stored (B1717). ). Then, the prefetch variation command processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the latest pending prefetching effect does not occur (result of B1713 is “N”), or when the generated prefetching effect is not an effect that immediately starts (result of B1715 is “N”), effect control device 300 causes As it is. The prefetch variable command processing ends.

[Symbol command processing]
Next, the details of the symbol command processing (B1210) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE portion and the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the symbol-related command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols in the special figures 1 and 2 changes, the symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type corresponds to a missing symbol, a 10R certain-variable big hit symbol shown in FIG. 28, a 4R certain-variable big hit symbol, and a 10R normal big hit symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing ends. If the special figure type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and the symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent is determined. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the effect, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received while a variable system command of a loss is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable command processing ends.

  If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904), and determines the effect during the variation. A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous announcement effect (the remaining number of continuous announcement effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907).

(Variable effect setting processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, details of the fluctuation effect setting processing (B1905) in the above-described fluctuation command processing (FIG. 54) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (the variation that does not enter the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (result of B2001 is “Y”), the first-half notice distribution corresponding to the number of production points, the model code, the special map type, the production mode, and the set value (probability set value) A group address table is set (B2002), and the address of the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of suspensions of the special figure type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without the reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of reservations increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

  If the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the variation pattern type is the variation with reach, the effect control device 300 determines the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the set value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are set. (B2005).

  After steps B2003 and B2005, effect control device 300 performs a lottery of a notice appearing during the first half change (before reach) (B2006). In addition, the lottery probability of the announcement depends on the set value. Subsequently, a second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, the symbol type, and the set value (probability set value) is set (B2007). The address of the second-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT unit is acquired (B2008), and a lottery of a notice that appears during the second-half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). In addition, the lottery probability of the announcement depends on the set value. After that, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the fluctuation command (the fluctuation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the fluctuation time and the main reach content can be known from the fluctuation command.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the contents of the effect (advance effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for indicating the set value (probability set value, setting) is determined (B2012). Thereafter, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed in accordance with the content of the fluctuation effect such as the reach effect or the notice effect (B2013). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, a stray eye is determined in the case of a missing symbol.

  Next, effect control device 300 performs display setting of the setting suggestion effect (B2014). The display setting of the variable effect such as the reach effect is performed (B2015), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (B2016). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is performed. The corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read (B2017). Subsequently, a voice number that determines an effect mode (sound output mode) based on the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines an effect mode by light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decorating device (the board decorating device 46, the frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color, light emitting timing, etc., of each LED) determined by the decorative number. .

  In addition, it is possible not only to set the voice number and the decoration number based on the effect contents but also to set the lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decoration light emitting unit (LED).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure change corresponding to the special figure type (B2019), and a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) other than the first to third special symbols. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation is performed (B2020). The fourth symbol change is displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the lamp display device 80 and / or the display device 41 provided other than the display device 41.

[Winning command processing]
Next, the details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the hit command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit command indicates a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the hit command indicates a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, if the hit command is a big hit fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect (B2102). It should be noted that the fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds of the current big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to fanfare (B2103), and the hit command processing ends. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from a symbol type determined from a symbol command (decorative special figure command corresponding to a stopped symbol pattern).

  If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent a fanfare (result of B2101 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents a round (B2101). B2104). When the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the hit command is a round command or a small hit opening command, the rendering control device 300 executes a round rendering setting process, and Is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2105, B2106), and the hit-related command processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent a round (result of B2104 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE portion indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the hit-related command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes an interval effect setting process, and the current gaming machine 10 The interval is set in the gaming state flag indicating the state (P machine state) (B2108, B2109), and the hit-related command processing ends. When the big winning opening is opened only once with a small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round, there is no interval command.

  If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent an interval (result of B2107 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command indicates ending ( B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the hit command is the ending command or the small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 sets the ending effect for setting the ending effect. The setting process is executed, ending is set in the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit-related command processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate ending (result of B2110 is "N"), effect control device 300 terminates the hit command without executing any processing. I do.

  Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 57 is a time chart of a setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period in relation to the special figure change display game. As a specific example, when a game ball wins in the start winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a special figure fluctuation display game is started, and a first setting suggestion effect (setting notification) is performed before a normal reach (first reach) occurs. After the normal reach, the second setting suggestion effect is executed after the SP reach is generated (it does not need to be generated) and before the special figure change display game ends. The number of times is not limited to two, but may be three or more.

  In the setting suggestion effect, for example, when displaying the variable display game on the display device 41 (FIG. 4), for example, characters A, characters B, and characters C (characters having shapes, colors, and patterns that can be distinguished from each other) are displayed. This is an effect that is displayed and the probability set value currently set can be suggested by the displayed number, and is generated at a predetermined probability (about 1/100 in the present embodiment). The setting suggestion effect also occurs at a timing other than the fluctuation display game (for example, at the time of a ball-out error being released).

  The character A suggests, for example, a so-called odd number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is one of the odd number probability setting values (1, 3, 5) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It indicates (notifies) that there is something. Note that the internal probability setting values 1 to 6 stored in the probability setting value area correspond to the settings 1 to 6, respectively.

  The character B indicates, for example, a so-called even number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is one of the even number probability setting values (2, 4, 6) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It indicates (notifies) that there is something.

  For example, the character C suggests that the currently set probability setting value is one of the high settings (probability setting values (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6) (notification). Is what you do.

  In the first setting suggestion effect, 1 to 3 characters A, B, and C are displayed. In the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters A, character B, and character C are displayed, but 4 to 10 characters are easily selected. For example, the difference between the displayed numbers of the characters A, B, and C is made more remarkable than in the first case, and which character is used for the setting suggestion intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100). You may be able to make a judgment.

(Reliability of setting suggestive effects)
FIG. 58 is a table illustrating an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 58 is merely an example, and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the setting suggestion effect, for example, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect by the character (character) can be set based on the number of characters A, characters B, and character C. By randomly selecting the number of characters with the winning probability according to the setting, the reliability can be set according to the number of characters. When a lottery is performed by sorting to each number, the winning probability is a sorting rate (selection rate). In the case where the lottery is selected independently of the numbers, the lottery may be repeated (for example, 4 and 7). In that case, one of the winnings is selected.

  Note that the setting suggestion effect may be performed only with the largest number of characters among the characters A, B, and C (the number of non-maximum characters is randomly selected and displayed regardless of the setting so that the setting is not suggested. Do).

  As described above, in the first setting suggestion effect, one to three characters A, characters B, and characters C are displayed. For this reason, the number of each of the characters A to C is one, two, and three, and the lottery is performed with the winning probability according to the setting.

  As described above, in the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters A, characters B, and characters C are displayed, respectively, so that the numbers of the characters A to C are 1, 2, 3, Four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, and ten cases are each drawn with a winning probability according to the setting. In addition, since 4 to 10 pieces are easily selected, the winning probability of 4 to 10 pieces is significantly larger than the winning probability of 1 to 3 pieces (extremely, the winning probability of 1 to 3 pieces is set to zero). Do).

  As shown in FIG. 58, the reliability is set to increase by 10% each time the displayed number of characters A, B, and C is increased by one, and the reliability is set to 100% when ten are displayed. can do. For example, one, two, and three characters C appear evenly in any setting, and the reliability of setting suggestion of high setting is low.

  Further, the reliability shown in FIG. 58 can be multiplied by the ratio of the total number of displayed characters to the number of displayed characters having the largest number of displayed characters.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times during the variable display game. For example, the specific character is increased in the first and second times, and the second setting is performed. In the suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion may be reported based on the amount of increase of the specific character (not the number of characters). For example, the setting suggestion by the character with the largest increase may be used as the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100), and the reliability of the setting suggestion may be reported based on the magnitude of the increase. It is possible.

  Note that the setting suggestion effect setting is performed in step B2012 and step B2014 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55) as described above.

[Expectation of big hit]
FIG. 59 is an example of a table showing a relationship between a setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment and a big hit. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the present embodiment, when a setting suggestion effect has occurred, the expectation of “big hit” is set high, and when it does not occur, it is set low. FIG. 59 is merely an example, and can be changed as appropriate.

  When a "big hit" occurs, the rate at which the "big hit" occurs after the setting suggestion effect is set to 80%, and the rate at which the "big hit" occurs without the setting suggestion effect is allocated to 20%.

  Conversely, when "losing" occurs, the rate of occurrence of "losing" after the setting suggestion effect is 1%, and the rate of occurrence of "losing" without the setting suggestion effect is 99%.

  With this, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a “big hit” will occur thereafter, and the “big hit” will occur even if there is no setting suggestion effect. Can surprise you.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (B), setting suggestion is performed by changing a first aspect (for example, number, color) of a character appearing in the setting suggesting effect, and a big hit is obtained in a second aspect (for example, size) of the character. It is also possible to report the degree of expectation. As described above, it is possible to perform the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) using the character with the largest display number among the characters A, B, and C. If any one of the characters A, B, and C has a different color from the other characters, the character having the different color suggests a setting intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100). It is also possible to perform a production.

  When a "big hit" occurs, the rate at which a "big hit" occurs after a setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is set to 50%, and after a setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character, a "big hit" is detected. Is 30%, and the rate at which a "big hit" occurs without a setting suggestion effect is 20%.

  Conversely, when "losing" occurs, the rate at which "losing" occurs after a setting suggesting effect displayed by a large character is set to 1%, and after a setting suggesting effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. The rate of occurrence of "outside" is 1%, and the rate of occurrence of "outside" without setting suggestion effect is 98%.

  This makes it possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a “big hit” will occur afterwards when a setting suggestion effect is produced. The game can be further raised, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 60 is a screen transition diagram of a setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. Here, a case will be described in which a setting suggestion effect is executed when executing a decorative special figure variable display game in which variable display develops to SP reach through normal reach. The setting suggestion effect is executed before normal reach (first time) and when SP reach (SP3 reach) occurs (second time).

  (A1) of FIG. 60 is a display screen at the time of starting the decoration special figure variation display game. A variable display area 610 (left area 610A, middle area 610C, right area 610B) is arranged at the center of the display device 41, and decoration stop symbols "6, 1, 2" are displayed in the variable display area 610. Further, in the lower right corner of the display device 41, a variable display area 615 is arranged, and in the variable display area 615, a stop symbol "6, 1, 2" is displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660 at the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 respectively have a number “3” indicating the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number. The number “0” indicating the number is displayed.

  In the first hold display section 630a that displays the first start-up memory as the first hold display, the hold display 633 (first hold display) moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold is displayed in the hold digestion area 640 of the rectangular frame. The hold display 633 at the right end of the display unit 630a moves. At this time, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b that displays the second start memory as the second hold display (second start memory display).

  Thereafter, in (A2), the change (↓↓↓) of the decoration special design (large design) is being executed in the change display area 610 as the identification information, and the change (↓↓) of the decoration reduction design (small design) is performed as the identification information. ↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the left area 610A, the right area 610B, and the middle area 610C of the change display area 610, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are changed, respectively. Further, a fluctuating hold display 633a indicating a hold related to the running special figure fluctuating display game (starting memory that has been a right to execute this special figure fluctuating display game) is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. In addition, a number “2” indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations and a number “0” indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations are displayed on the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660, respectively. ing.

  At this time, a plurality of characters A (bear), characters B (frog), and characters C (tiger) are displayed on the display device 41 as the first setting suggestion effect. In (A2), two characters A, two characters B, and one character C are displayed. At this time, the reliability of setting suggestion of character A is 20%, and the reliability of setting suggestion of character B is 20%. Is 20%, and the reliability of the suggestion of the setting of the character C is 10%, and it is not so clear which character makes the effect suggestion by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100).

  However, for a player who knows that the setting suggestion effect is performed multiple times, it is foreseeable that a highly reliable setting suggestion will be performed in the next setting suggestion effect, so the setting suggestion is not clear in this way Even in the setting suggestion effect, the player can pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

  The display position of each character is arbitrary, and may be displayed as a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image in which the expression of each character and the display position move.

  Next, in (A3), a reach state (normal reach) is reached, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first setting suggestion effect ends. In (A3), the display of each character is deleted, but the display may be continued as it is. At this time, the character display 755a “reach” is displayed below the variable display area 610.

  Then, in (A4), the reach evolves from the normal reach state to the SP3 reach, and a movie effect (movie effect) is executed at the center of the display screen, and the left symbol and the right symbol are positioned at the upper corner of the screen. Moving. At this time, the display of the character display 755a “reach” may be erased.

  In addition, the second setting suggestion effect is executed with the shift to SP3 reach. Here, for example, characters A, B, and C are displayed around a movie effect (moving image effect), and more characters are displayed than in the first setting suggestion effect. In (A4), three characters A, four characters B, and five characters C are displayed. Here, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion is performed based on the number (5) of the characters C having the largest display number, and the reliability of the character C setting suggestion (either the probability setting value is 5 or 6) is 50%. Can be displayed (set).

  Also, the reliability of the suggestion of the setting of the character C is (5/12) × 50% = 20.000, based on the ratio of the number (5) of the characters C having the largest display number and the total number of characters displayed (3 + 4 + 5 = 12). It can be displayed (set) as 8%. At this time, in order to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion by the character C is higher, in the second setting suggesting effect, a lottery may be performed so that the display number of the character A or the character B is reduced from the first time. .

  Furthermore, one character C is displayed at the first time, five characters are displayed at the second time, and the number of displayed characters is increased by four. Therefore, for example, if the increase in the reliability of each character is set to 10%, the reliability of the setting suggestion of the second character C can be set to 4 × 10% of the increase (regardless of the number).

  Then, in (A5), the special figure change display game ends and the setting suggestion effect ends, and the big hit decoration stop symbol “3, 3, 3” is displayed in the change display area 610, and the big hit stop symbol “3” , 3, 3 "are displayed in the variable display area 615. In addition, the character display 755b “big hit !!” is displayed below the decoration stop symbol. Also, at this time, the fluctuating suspension display 633a displayed in the suspension digestion area 640 disappears, whereby it can be confirmed that one reservation has been completely consumed.

  Subsequently, in (A6), a big hit round game starts, a big hit state (special game state), and a big hit round effect is started. In the setting suggestion effect (the first and / or the second time), by displaying the character A, the character B, and the character C larger than the case shown in FIG. 60, the expectation of the big hit is further increased. Notification (setting) may be performed.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect (first modification)]
FIG. 61 is a time chart of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first modified example, a pseudo continuous effect including a predetermined number of (three) pseudo fluctuations is executed before a normal reach occurs, a first setting suggestion effect occurs during a second pseudo fluctuation, and a second setting suggestive effect is generated. The setting suggestion effect occurs during the third pseudo fluctuation. The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations may be determined, for example, in step B2010 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 55). Note that the pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which a pseudo change for changing and temporarily stopping the decoration special symbol (identification information) is performed a predetermined number of times (predetermined steps) from the start to the end of one change display game.

  Character A (red) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called odd number setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an odd number probability setting value (1, 3) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 5).

  Character B (blue) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called even number setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an even number probability setting value (2, 4) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 6).

  Character C (yellow) (FIG. 62A) is, for example, a case where the currently set probability setting value is a high setting (one of the probability setting values (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests that there is.

  In the first modification, a group effect of forming and displaying a character group by a plurality of characters is executed. In the character group, the total number of characters A (red) and characters B (blue) is kept constant (or almost constant), and the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is even or odd is reported based on the ratio. . In the character group, the reliability of setting suggestion that the probability setting value is the high setting “5, 6” is reported by the number of characters C (yellow). Note that the character A and the character B may have the same shape only by changing the color.

  Since the character A (red) and the character B (blue) indicate an odd-number setting and an even-number setting, which are exclusion events, the total number is kept constant, and the ratio of the character A (red) and the character B (blue) is calculated. The reliability of the setting suggestion can be reported.

  In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is set to 7: 3, and in the second setting suggestion effect, the character A (red): character B (blue) By setting the ratio of the numbers to 9: 1, the reliability of the setting suggestion of the odd number setting in which the probability setting value is an odd number can be increased. For example, at the ratio 7: 3, the reliability of the odd setting is 70% (the reliability of the even setting is 30%), and at the ratio 9: 1, the reliability of the odd setting is 90% (the reliability of the even setting is 90%). 10%).

  Conversely, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is set to 3: 7, and in the second setting suggestion effect, character A (red): character B By setting the ratio of the number of (blue) to 1: 9, it is also possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion of the even number setting in which the probability setting value is an even number. For example, at the ratio 3: 7, the reliability of the even setting is 70% (the reliability of the odd setting is 30%), and at the ratio 1: 9, the reliability of the even setting is 90% (the reliability of the odd setting is 90%). 10%).

  Furthermore, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is five, and in the second setting suggestion effect, the number of characters C (yellow) is increased to seven, thereby increasing the probability. It is also possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion that the setting value is a high setting.

  In the first modified example, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, if character C (or character A or character B) is not displayed, or if none of character A, character B, and character C is displayed, a big hit The degree of expectation can be set as low. Also, when all of the characters A, B, and C are displayed, it is also possible to set the character with high expectation of a big hit.

  Further, it is also possible to set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit changes based on a change in the displayed size or color of the character A, the character B, and the character C. In the case where the character performing the setting suggestion effect indicates that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high, this may be performed together with the change of the display mode indicating that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high in the change-in-hold display 633a of the reservation digestion area 640. Alternatively, the display mode change may be prohibited so that the player can pay attention to the setting suggestion effect.

[Screen Transition Diagram (First Modification)]
FIG. 62A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 62B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  (B1) in FIG. 62A is the same as (A1) in FIG. (B2) of FIG. 62A is the same as (A2) of FIG. 60, but the fluctuating display displayed in the fluctuating display area 610 is the first pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo continuous effect.

  Then, in (B3), the first pseudo variation (single production) of the pseudo continuous production ends, and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed. In the middle region 610C, a pseudo continuous symbol indicating the pseudo continuous production is provided. Is stopped. In addition, a character display 752 “pseudo twice” indicating the number of times of execution of pseudo fluctuations to be started (number of pseudo runs) is displayed.

  Thereafter, in (B4), the second pseudo fluctuation starts and the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. For example, as shown in (B4), an image in which a meteor shower of characters A (star-shaped), character B (star-shaped), and character C (triangle) flows from right to left on the screen flows for a predetermined time. Then, it can be notified that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high by the flow of the video.

  At this time, for example, the ratio of the number of displayed characters A (red) to the number of displayed characters B (blue) is 7: 3, indicating that the reliability of the setting suggestion for the odd number setting is slightly higher. ing. In addition, since the character C (yellow) is also displayed, the display of the character C (yellow) can indicate that the setting is high with a predetermined reliability (FIG. 58 is good). During the first setting suggestion effect (group effect), the character display 752 “pseudo two times” may be kept displayed or may be deleted.

  Next, in (B5), the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. Also in (B5), the character display 752 “pseudo twice” may be displayed as it is or may be deleted. The second pseudo fluctuation continues in the fluctuation display area 610.

  Then, in (B6), the second symbol change is completed and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle region 610C, the pseudo symbol symbol indicating a pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed. At the same time, a character display 752 “three times pseudo” indicating the number of times of execution of pseudo fluctuations to be started (number of times of pseudo runs) is displayed.

  Thereafter, in (B7) of FIG. 62B, the pseudo fluctuation (↓↓↓) of the third variable decoration special symbol (large symbol) is executed in the variable display area 610 for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, in (B8), a second setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. At this time, as in (B4), an image in which a meteor shower of characters A, B, and C flows from right to left on the screen flows for a predetermined time. However, this time, the ratio of the display number of the character A (red) to the display number of the character B (blue) is 9: 1, and the reliability indicating that the setting is an odd number is further increased.

  In addition, since the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is also increased from five to seven, it is possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased by the increase (see FIG. 58). Conversely, if the number of characters C (yellow) displayed does not increase or decreases in the second setting suggestion effect, it is notified that the reliability of the setting suggestion by displaying the character C (yellow) is not so high. You can also.

  Next, in (B9), the reach state is reached, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. In this case, since the pseudo continuous effect has been completed, the pseudo continuous symbol is not displayed in the middle area 610C. The character display 755 “reach” is displayed below the variable display area 610.

  Thereafter, in (B10), the special figure variable display game is ended, and the stop symbols “3, 1, 3” of “outside” are displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615. Also, at this time, the fluctuating suspension display 633a displayed in the suspension digestion area 640 disappears, whereby it can be confirmed that one reservation has been completely consumed.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect (second modification)]
FIG. 63 is a time chart of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the gaming machine 10, a character zone effect (for example, a notice effect using the entire display screen) may be performed with a predetermined probability based on a winning winning with a high expectation of a jackpot. It can be notified that the degree of expectation is high.

  Therefore, in the second modified example, a setting suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined probability when entering a character zone, and the appearance of the setting suggestion effect informs that the degree of expectation of a big hit is higher than in the case where only a character zone occurs.

  In addition, the character zone is continued until the hold that triggered the entry of the character zone is consumed, and during that time, the variable display game is performed a plurality of times together with the hold. At this time, a setting suggestion effect is performed each time the variable display game is started, and the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased each time the variation display game is repeated.

  As described above, in the second modification, the character zone effect is executed over a plurality of special figure change display games as a look-ahead effect based on hold (a look-ahead zone effect). 52). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character zone effect occurs at a predetermined timing (timing) such as when the expectation of the big hit of the running special figure variation display game is high and is performed over a plurality of variation display games. May be set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55).

  In the second modified example, when the first start memory (or the second start memory) may already have three holds (hold 3, hold 2, hold 1), a hold (hold 0) with a high expectation of a big hit is made. It is assumed that a prize is won and the hold is completed in the order of hold 3, hold 2, hold 1, and hold 0.

  Then, the first setting suggestion effect is performed at the time of digestion of the hold 3, the second setting suggestion effect is performed at the time of the digestion of the hold 2, and the third setting suggestion effect is performed at the time of the digestion of the hold 1. A fourth setting suggestion effect is performed when the reservation 0 is exhausted.

  In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A indicating setting and suggesting odd probability setting values are displayed, and two characters B indicating setting and suggesting even probability setting values are displayed. Is not displayed (0 characters are displayed).

  In the second setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A indicating setting and suggesting an odd probability setting value are displayed, and three characters B indicating setting and suggesting an even number probability setting value are displayed. Is displayed.

  In the third setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A suggesting setting odd probability setting values are displayed, five characters B suggesting setting even probability setting values are displayed, and a high setting probability setting value is displayed. Are displayed.

  In the fourth setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A indicating setting of odd probability setting values are displayed, and five characters B indicating setting of even probability setting values are displayed, and the probability setting value of high setting is displayed. Are displayed.

  As described above, the display number of characters that suggest the setting intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) is increased each time the number of times of the special figure change display game is repeated. In FIG. 63, since the number of characters B to be displayed increases and is larger than that of the character A, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability set value is an even number is smaller than the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability set value is an odd number. Can be determined to be high.

  In addition, since the number of characters C to be displayed increases to 0, 1, 4, and 7 as the number of times of the special figure change display game increases, the display mode (increase amount) of the character C is set to a high value. Can be reported that the reliability of the setting suggestion is high.

  Conversely, if the display number of the character C does not increase or decreases even if the number of times of the special figure variable display game is repeated, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the setting is high according to the display mode (decrease amount) of the character C is increased. You can also report that it is low.

[Screen transition diagram (second modified example)]
FIG. 64A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 64B is a screen transition diagram (the latter half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  (C1) of FIG. 64A is a display screen at the time of starting the decoration special figure variation display game, and a stop symbol is displayed similarly to FIG. 60 (A1). The number "4" indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number "0" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations are displayed on the special figure 1 number of reservations display section 650 and the special figure 2 number of reservations display section 660, respectively. .

  In (C1), the hold display 633 (hold 3) moves to the right side (hold shift) in the first hold display section 630a that displays the first start memory as the first hold display, and is shifted to the hold digestion area 640 of the rectangular frame. The hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display section 630a moves.

  Here, the hold display 633 (hold 0) displayed on the first hold display section 630a has been determined in advance as having a high expectation of a big hit and performing a setting suggestion effect at the time of winning. Accordingly, the hold display 633 (hold 0) indicates that the degree of expectation is high by changing the color or the like of the other hold to a display mode different from that of the other hold, but the display mode may be omitted.

  Thereafter, in (C2), the same fluctuation display as in (A3) of FIG. 60 is performed, and the digestion of the hold 3 is started. At this time, a fluctuating hold display 633a indicating a hold (hold 3) relating to the running special figure change display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 is “3”.

  In addition, when the digestion of the hold 3 is started, the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the character enters the character zone, and the background (color, pattern, etc.) displayed on the display device 41 changes.

  In (C2), three characters A (bears) are displayed, two characters B (frogs) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is not displayed.

  By the way, as described above, the hold display 633 (hold 0) is determined in advance as having a high expectation of a big hit and performing a setting suggestive effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it is also possible to enter the character zone at the stage where the hold 0 wins (stage before (C1)). However, the attention to the hold 3 can be increased by rushing into the character zone when the hold 3 is consumed.

  After that, in (C3), the first variable display game is finished, and the stop symbols “3, 2, 9” of “outside” are displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615. When the 633a also disappears, the hold 3 has been digested. At this time, the character A and the character B are moved to positions where they do not overlap the stop symbol "3, 2, 9", or are deleted, thereby ending the first setting suggestion effect.

  Next, in (C4), the same fluctuation display as in (C2) is performed, and the digestion of hold 2 is started. At this time, a fluctuating hold display 633a indicating a hold (hold 2) related to the running special figure change display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display section 650 is “2”.

  When the digestion of the hold 2 is started, a second setting suggestion effect is performed, three characters A (bears) are displayed, three characters B (frogs) are displayed, and a character C (tiger) is displayed. One is displayed.

  After that, in (C5), the second variation display game is finished, and the stop symbols “5, 7, 8” of “outside” are displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615. When 633a also disappears, Hold 2 has been digested. At this time, the character A, the character B, and the character C are moved to positions where they do not overlap the stop symbol "5, 7, 8", or are deleted, thereby ending the second setting suggestion effect.

  Next, in (C6), the same fluctuation display as (C2) and (C4) is performed, and the digestion of hold 1 is started. At this time, a fluctuating hold display 633a indicating a hold (hold 1) related to the running special figure change display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Also, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 is “1”.

  When the digestion of Hold 1 is started, a third setting suggestion effect is performed, three characters A (bears) are displayed, five characters B (frogs) are displayed, and characters C (tigers) are displayed. Four are displayed.

  After that, in (C7), the third variation display game is completed, and a stop symbol “4, 2, 1” of “outside” is displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615. When 633a also disappears, hold 1 has been digested. At this time, the character A, the character B, and the character C are moved to positions where they do not overlap the stop symbol "4, 2, 1", or are deleted, thereby ending the third setting suggestion effect.

  Next, in (C8), the same fluctuation display as in (C2), (C4) and (C6) is performed, and the digestion of hold 0 is started. At this time, a fluctuating hold display 633a indicating a hold (hold 0) related to the running special figure change display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 is “0”.

  When the digestion of Hold 0 is started, a fourth setting suggestion effect is performed, three characters A (bears) are displayed, five characters B (frogs) are displayed, and characters C (tigers) are displayed. Seven are displayed.

  Then, in (C9), the fourth variation display game is completed, and the stop symbols “2, 6, 9” of “outside” are displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615. When 633a also disappears, the hold 1 has been consumed, and the character zone ends. At this time, the character A, the character B, and the character C are erased, thereby ending the fourth setting suggestion effect.

[Other settings suggestive effects]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of another setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 65, a setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 by a right strike instruction display 620 of the strike instruction display instead of the character. In this case, the reliability of the high setting may be increased as the number of the right strike instruction displays 620 increases.

  Also, even during times other than during the special figure change display game, a setting suggestion effect may be executed as long as the player can easily pay attention to the display device 41. In the example of FIG. 65, when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the special game state, such as during a big fanfare, a setting suggestion effect is executed by the right-hand instruction display 620. As described above, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a timing that is easy for the player to pay attention to, thereby preventing the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked. In addition, at the time of the fanfare of the big hit, a display 621 "Aim for the gate!" Is displayed, which suggests that a game ball is to be shot at the general-purpose starting gate 34 by right-handing.

  In the case where a distribution gate for selecting the upper limit of the number of rounds of a big hit is provided in the right game area 32, the display 621 may indicate that the distribution gate is aimed at instead of the ordinary start gate 34. Since the big hit round does not start until the game ball passes through the distribution gate, it is possible to further prevent a setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating another example of another setting suggestion effect. In the example of FIG. 66, the setting suggestion effect is executed when an error (here, an out-of-ball error) occurs that the player cannot intentionally wake up and must interrupt the game. Even in this case, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a timing that is easy for the player to pay attention to, so that the setting suggestion effect can be prevented from being overlooked.

  During the decorative special figure change display game started in (D1) of FIG. 66, a ball-out error occurs due to the detection of the shot-ball out switch signal as shown in (D2), and an error display 623 “ball out error” is displayed. Is done. The character 625 is displayed together with the error display 623, and the display mode (expression) of the character 625 notifies the user of the high reliability. Thereafter, as shown in (D3), the character 625 is displayed together with the error release display 627 "Error has been released" indicating that the error has been released, and the character 625 is similarly displayed according to the display mode (expression) of the character 625. A high setting reliability is reported.

[Operation and Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the above, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes the effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the effect related to the variable display game for changing and displaying the identification information, and the stop result of the variable display game. Is a special result, a setting change means (setting key switch 93) capable of changing a set value (probability set value) corresponding to a setting related to the game in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player. , RAM initialization switch 112), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a setting suggestion effect suggesting information (probability setting value) related to the set value a plurality of times during a predetermined period.

  With the above-described configuration, a setting suggestion effect relating to a variable display game or the like is performed a plurality of times in a predetermined period (for example, a period of one variable display game or a period over a plurality of variable display games), thereby rendering the player. Can be focused on the game, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times in one variable display game.

  With the above-described configuration, by increasing the degree of attention to one variable display game in which a plurality of setting suggestion effects are performed, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the effects and to concentrate on the game.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable display games.

  With the above configuration, a setting suggestion effect is performed in accordance with the timing of an effect performed over a plurality of variable display games, such as a zone effect, so that the player can pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) sets the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect executed later to be greater than the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect executed first. , Set a plurality of setting suggestion effects.

  With the above-described configuration, by providing a difference in the reliability of the setting suggestion depending on the timing, the player has a pleasure of waiting for a setting suggesting effect at a specific timing while watching the effect. Therefore, by raising the sense of expectation for the next setting suggestion effect, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the effect and to concentrate on the game.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) can notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game is a special result by causing the setting suggestion effect to appear, and the setting suggestion effect mode. (Such as an increase in the number of characters) changes the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect.

  By associating the setting suggestion effect with the degree of expectation of the special result (big hit), the above configuration allows even a player who is playing a game without worrying about the probability setting value to pay attention to the effect, and sets the setting suggestion effect. By associating the change with the reliability of the setting suggestion, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect and the player can concentrate on the game.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) displays the same type of image (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41 in a plurality of setting suggestion effects, and The effect forms of the setting suggestion effects of the times are associated with each other.

  With the above-described configuration, by displaying the same type of character a plurality of times in the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect performed a plurality of times is related to each other, so that the setting suggestion can be grasped by focusing on it, It is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and to concentrate on the game.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game for changing and displaying the identification information, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, a setting changing means (setting key switch 93, RAM initial setting) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) corresponding to a setting related to the game. Switch 112), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests information (probability setting value) related to the set value. It is characterized in that it is possible to notify the degree of expectation that the game stop result is a special result.

  With the configuration described above, the setting suggestion effect associated with the degree of expectation of the special result (big hit) is performed, thereby preventing the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) can execute a setting suggestion effect by displaying the characters (characters A, B, and C) on the display device 41.

  With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect can be performed in a simple and easy-to-identify manner.

[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The second embodiment relates to a display probability set value in a variable setting state (setting change mode) and a display method thereof.

[Work setting value, display probability setting value, effect control information]
FIG. 67 shows the relationship between the set value for work, the set value for display probability (setting examples 1, 2, 3, 4), and the effect control information (effect set value, effect set value) for the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows a correspondence relationship. Normally, the game control device 100 holds six work setting values “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” (setting values) and correspondingly sets probability setting values (information on setting values). And information corresponding to the big hit probability (and the small hit probability) "1,2,3,4,5,6". However, depending on the gaming machine 10, the big hit probability (and the small hit probability) corresponding to different probability setting values may be the same, and the number of types of setting of the display probability setting value may be smaller than six. In other words, in order to prevent confusion among persons involved in the hall and the like, even if the probability setting values used or stored inside the gaming machine 10 are different, if the same big hit probability (and small hit probability) is the same, the big hit probability (and small hit probability) The display probability setting value associated with the hit probability is the same. The same display probability setting value means the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

  In the setting example 1 of FIG. 67, 1-6 is set as the display probability set value for the work set value 0-5, and the display probability set values are set to different values. The setting example 2 shows a case where all the display probability setting values corresponding to the six work setting values are set to “1”. In setting example 3, the display probability set values corresponding to the work set values “0”, “1”, and “2” are set to “1”, respectively, and the work set values “3”, “4”, “ The case where the display probability setting value corresponding to “5” is set to “2” is shown. In the setting example 4, the display probability set values corresponding to the work setting values “0” and “1” are set to “1”, respectively, and the display probability set values corresponding to the work set values “2” and “3” are set. In this case, the set values are set to “2”, and the display probability set values corresponding to the work set values “4” and “5” are set to “3”.

  In the setting example 1, since the display probability set value changes each time the RAM initialization switch 112 as the set value change switch is pressed, the operator operates the gaming machine 10 (game control device 100) to operate the RAM initialization switch 112. Can be identified as reacting.

  On the other hand, in the setting example 2, since the display probability set values are all “1” regardless of the work set value, the display probability set value is displayed before and after the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed. The value remains "1" and there is no change, and it cannot be determined whether or not the display on the performance display device 152 (display unit) is responding to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 by the operator. Also in the setting example 3, when the setting values for work are changed from “0” to “1”, “1” to “2”, “3” to “4”, and “4” to “5”, respectively. It cannot be determined whether or not the gaming machine 10 (game control device 100) has responded to the operation. Further, also in the setting example 4, the gaming machine 10 (the game control 10) is used to change the operation setting values from “0” to “1”, “2” to “3”, and “4” to “5”. It cannot be determined whether the device 100) is responding.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, that is, each time the work setting value is changed, the display of the display probability setting value is temporarily displayed before and after the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed. By displaying differently, it is possible to identify whether or not the gaming machine 10 (game control device 100) is responding to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

[Probability setting change / confirmation processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a probability setting change / confirmation process of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process of the present embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment, but before and after changing the work setting value (and the display probability setting value), intermediate data (intermediate data) is set as the probability setting value display data. ) Is transmitted (displayed) to the performance display device 152.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or in the register) is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “5”, and the probability set value is set corresponding to the work set value. After updating the probability set values 1 to 6 of the area by +1 (A2410), the intermediate data is set in the probability set value display data area as the probability set value display data (A2411), and the set probability set value display data (intermediate data) ) Is output (A2412). In this case, until the next probability set value display data is output (A2404), the performance display device 152 has a display mode based on the intermediate data. If the display time of the intermediate data is short and cannot be recognized by the operator, after outputting the probability set value display data (intermediate data), a timer for delaying by a predetermined time may be operated.

  As a display mode of the intermediate data, an LED (light emitting member: here, 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) for displaying a number or the like of each digit of the 4-digit performance display device 152 is used. ) (FIGS. 69 and 70), a display mode in which all the LEDs are lit (FIG. 71), a display mode in which a specific position of a part of the LEDs is lit (FIG. 72) (display probability setting value This is different from the display mode shown).

  There is also a display mode in which the display of the display probability set value is left as it is, and at least one LED of a digit different from the digit for displaying the display probability set value emits light (FIG. 73).

  Further, during the setting change, the information of the display probability set value that the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) transmits (displays) to the performance display device 152 includes an LED (segment a, b) that displays the display probability set value. , C, d, e, f, g) as well as dot data (Dp = 1) for lighting a dot-shaped LED (segment Dp) at the lower right of the LED (additional information) Is included. Therefore, as the intermediate data, a display mode in which all the LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 including the dots are turned off (FIG. 74), and a display mode in which all the other LEDs are turned off while maintaining the lighting of the segment Dp (FIG. 75) ).

  By the way, the game control device 100 transmits the information of the work setting value (probability setting value) after the setting change to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) (FIG. 6B, A1044), and the effect control device 300 receives the information. (FIG. 50, B1323), and can be used as an effect setting value (effect setting value). Then, as shown in FIG. 67, the effect control device 300 includes effect control information “1” to “6” corresponding to the operation setting values “0” to “5” as effect setting values. Here, the effect control device 300 can make the effects different from each other based on the effect control information “1” to “6” as effect setting values. For example, in the variable effect setting process of FIG. 55, the effect contents are set based on the set values. Thereby, the entertainment control information is changed every time the probability set value is changed, and the effect is given a variation, whereby the interest in the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

[Display example of performance display device]
FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display mode of a display probability set value in Setting Example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The intermediate data in FIG. 69 has a display mode in which all the LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 are turned off.

  Further, the probability set value display data is such that the character “S” appears at digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character “E” appears at digit 2, and the character “T” appears at digit 1 (“SET” A display mode is provided in which the LEDs are turned on so that the character appears) and the current display probability setting value appears in the digit 0. The probability set value display data is set so that the LED of the digit 1, the digit 2, and the digit 3 are turned off, and the value of the current display probability set value appears in the digit 0 (may be displayed in another digit). A display mode in which an LED is lit may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 69, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on, a setting change mode (setting variable state) is set. In this case, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c of the game control device 100 (in this case, any value from “1” to “6”, 1 is read out), the character “S” appears in the digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character “E” appears in the digit 2, the character “T” appears in the digit 1, and the digit 0 appears. , One type of display probability setting value “1” is lit and displayed, and the character “SET1” is lit and displayed as a whole. When the setting variable state (setting change mode) is entered, a value (1 is subtracted from the probability setting value) corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area is stored in the working setting value area (in the RAM 111c or a register). May be stored.

  Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (for example, from “0” to “1”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time. Alternatively, a display mode may be adopted in which the display probability setting value “1” is temporarily turned off while the lighting of “SET” is maintained.

  After the lapse of the predetermined time, the character “SET1” including the changed display probability set value “1” corresponding to the changed work set value (for example, “1”) (there is no change in appearance). Is lit.

  When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (for example, from “1” to “2”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

  After the lapse of the predetermined time, the character “SET1” including the changed display probability set value “1” corresponding to the changed work set value (for example, “2”) (there is no change in appearance). Is lit.

  As described above, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the character "SET1" including the display probability setting value "1" can be identified to be temporarily turned off and then turned on again. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the lights are turned off. Further, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value in the work setting value area is changed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the last updated work setting value is set. The corresponding probability set value is stored in the probability set value area.

  FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display mode of a display probability set value in Setting Example 2 or Setting Example 3 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment.

  First, in FIG. 70, the case where the display probability set value is the setting example 3 and the work set value at the start of the setting change is “1” is considered for convenience.

  When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on, the performance display device 152 (digit 0) includes the display probability setting value “1” corresponding to the work setting value “1”. The character "SET1" is displayed.

  Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (from “1” to “2”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

  Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character “SET1” (no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value “1” corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, “2”) is displayed. Lights up.

  When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (from “2” to “3”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

  After a lapse of a predetermined time, the character “SET2” including the display probability set value “2” corresponding to the changed work set value “3” is displayed. Thereby, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from “1” to “2” by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112.

  As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability set value changes (1 → 1 → 2 → 2 → 2 → 1 →...) With the change of the work set value. When the value of the display probability set value is switched, the light is temporarily turned off, and then the next display probability set value is displayed. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the lights are turned off.

  Next, in FIG. 70, the case where the display probability set value is the setting example 4 and the work set value at the start of the setting change is “0” will be considered for convenience.

  When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the performance display device 152 (digit 0) includes a display probability setting value “1” corresponding to the work setting value “0”. The character "SET1" is displayed.

  Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (from “0” to “1”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

  After the lapse of the predetermined time, a character “SET1” (no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value “1” corresponding to the changed work setting value “1” is displayed. You.

  When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (from “1” to “2”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

  After the lapse of the predetermined time, the character “SET2” including the changed display probability set value “2” corresponding to the changed work set value “2” is displayed. Thereby, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from “1” to “2” by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. Thereafter, although not shown, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed twice, the character “SET3” including the display probability set value “3” corresponding to the work set value “4” is lit on.

  As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability set value changes (1 → 1 → 2 → 2 → 3 → 3 → 1 →...) In accordance with the change of the work set value.・). Further, when the value of the display probability set value is switched, all the LEDs are turned off for a predetermined time, and then the next display probability set value is lit and displayed. Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the LEDs are turned off.

  FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram illustrating a first modification of the display mode of the display probability set values in Setting Example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The modification described below will be described with reference to Setting Example 2, but is also applicable to Setting Example 1, Setting Example 3, and Setting Example 4.

  In the first modified example, as opposed to FIG. 69 (or FIG. 70), all the LEDs in the digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 of the performance display device 152 are illuminated (at least the digit). (It is sufficient that any one of 3, digit 2, and digit 1 is lit and displayed). On the other hand, in the probability set value display data, all the LEDs are turned off at the digits 3, 2, and 1 of the performance display device 152 (as described above, the character "SET" may be displayed). There is provided a display mode in which LEDs constituting the display of the display probability set value are turned on.

  The display mode of the display probability set value in the first modification transitions in the same manner as in FIG. On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LEDs of the predetermined time, digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are all turned on by the intermediate data, and then the display probability set value after the change is displayed. .

  Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability set value of the digit 0 is turned off for a predetermined time, and all the LEDs of the digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are replaced. Lights for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram illustrating a second modification of the display mode of the display probability set value in Setting Example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. In the second modification shown in FIG. 72, transition is made in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is displayed in the same digit (digit 0) as the display probability set value, and has a display mode different from the display probability set value before the change and the display probability set value after the change.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the intermediate data has a display mode in which, for example, only the LED (segment g) of the digit 0 is turned on. In addition, in the second modified example, any display mode other than the display indicating the display probability set value can be applied. Further, any other digit (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) may be arbitrarily displayed using the intermediate data.

  Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability set value of the digit 0 is turned off for a predetermined time, and the LED (for example, the segment g) at the specific position of the digit 0 is turned on for a predetermined time. I do.

  FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram illustrating a third modification of the display mode of the display probability set value in Setting Example 2 in gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. In the third modification example shown in FIG. 73, transition is made in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is also displayed at a digit (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) different from the digit (digit 0) at which the display probability set value is displayed. The display is maintained. In other words, the intermediate data is different from the display probability set value before the change and the display probability set value after the change as a whole, but the digit for displaying the display probability set value is the display probability set value before the change. This is a display mode for sharing information.

  In the third modification, the game control device 100 includes information on the display probability set value (digit 0) stored in the probability set value display data area and the intermediate data (digit 3, digit 2,. Digit 1) is synthesized, and the synthesized data (intermediate data) is set in the probability set value display data area as probability set value display data (executed in A2411 in FIG. 68).

  As shown in FIG. 73, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are turned on, and the combined data includes all the digits of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1. A display mode is provided in which the LED is turned on and the LED for displaying the display probability set value before the change in the digit 0 is turned on. In addition, the probability set value display data has a display mode in which the probability set value is lit and displayed in the digit 0, and the digits 3, 2, and 1 are turned off. You may make it.

  Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, all the LEDs of the digits 3, 2, and 1 are turned on for a predetermined time, and the lighting of the display probability set value during that period is also maintained.

  FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram illustrating a fourth modification of the display mode of the display probability set value in Setting Example 2 in gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. In the fourth modification example shown in FIG. 74, transition is made in the same manner as in the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display using the display probability set value (additional information).

  In the fourth modification, the game control device 100 enters the variable setting state (first state) by turning on the power to the gaming machine 10 with the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 turned on in the same manner as described above. . At this time, the game control device 100 adds dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information) to the probability set value display data. Thereby, it is possible to indicate that the displayed display probability setting value “1.” is a provisional value during the setting change.

  On the other hand, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off. Therefore, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LED displaying the “SET” of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 on the performance display device 152, the LED displaying the display probability setting value “1” of the digit 0, And the LED (segment Dp) that displays the dot of the digit 0 turns off for a predetermined time.

  When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the setting ends (second state). At this time, the game control device 100 sets the probability set value display data (digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1) indicating the display probability set value (including the dot data (Dp = 0)) after the setting change (after confirmation). The LED that displays “SET” has a display mode of extinguishing) in the probability setting display data area, so that the display probability setting value “1” after the setting change is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display probability setting value The "1" lighting display is turned off.

  FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram illustrating a fifth modified example of the display mode of the display probability set value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fifth modified example shown in FIG. 75 transitions in the same manner as the display form of the fourth modified example shown in FIG. 74 except for the display using the intermediate data.

  On the other hand, as the intermediate data, the LED for displaying “SET” of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 and the LED for displaying the display probability set value of digit 0 are turned off, and the dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information ) Is displayed in an LED (segment Dp). Therefore, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LED for displaying the characters “SET” of digits 3, 2, and 1 and the LED for displaying the display probability set value of digit 0 are displayed on the performance display device 152. While the light is turned off, the lighting of the LED (segment Dp) that displays the dot of the digit 0 is maintained. Therefore, it can be easily identified that the display of the performance display device 152 responds to the operation and that the setting is being changed.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
The present embodiment includes a game control unit (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition), and when a game result is a special result, In a gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player, setting change means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting setting change means for changing setting values (work setting values, probability setting values) according to settings related to the game. A key switch 93) and a display unit (performance display device 152) capable of displaying information on the set value (information corresponding to the jackpot probability, a display probability set value) by causing a light emitting member (LED) to emit light. The setting change means includes a first switch (RAM initialization switch 112) for changing a set value (work setting value), and a game control means (game control device). 00) changes the set value (work set value) in response to the operation of the first switch (RAM initialization switch 112), and displays information about the changed set value (display probability set value) on the display unit. (Performance display device 152), and when the set value (work set value) is changed, information on the set value before change (display probability set value) and information on the set value after change (display) After displaying intermediate information (intermediate data) different from the setting value for display on the display unit (performance display device 152), information about the changed set value (probability setting value for display) is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152). ).

  According to the above configuration, before and after the change of the probability set value, intermediate data having a display mode different from the information about the set value before and after the change (display probability set value) is displayed. It is possible to identify whether or not the display of the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation of the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).

  In the present embodiment, the information relating to the set value (display probability set value) is the same regardless of the set value (work set value), and is information corresponding to the probability value that the game is a special result.

  In the above-described configuration, the information (display probability setting value) related to the set value is not changed before and after the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed, but the intermediate data is displayed. It is possible to identify whether or not the display on the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding in response to the operation of the activation switch 112).

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate information (intermediate data) is information for turning off all the light emitting members (LEDs) or information for turning on all the light emitting members.

  With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify a change from the information on the set value before the change (display probability set value) to the information on the set value after the change (display probability set value).

  In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has a plurality of digits, and the intermediate information (intermediate data) is set to a digit different from the digit that displays the information (display probability set value) related to the set value. Is displayed.

  With the above configuration, the display of the intermediate data indicates that the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation, and the information regarding the set value (display probability set value) is not deleted. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the probability setting value).

  In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) includes information about the set value (display probability set value) and additional information (Dp = 1) different from the information about the set value (display probability set value). Can be displayed, and the setting change means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) is a second switch for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value (work setting value) can be changed. (Setting key switch 93), and the second switch (setting key switch 93) changes the state between a first state that allows the transition to the variable setting state and a second state that ends the variable setting state. The game control means (game control device 100) transmits (displays) the additional information (Dp = 1) together with the information on the set value (display probability set value) in the first state and the second state. When Stopping the transmission of the pressure information (display) (send dot data (Dp = 0)), intermediate information (intermediate data) includes the additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)).

  With the above configuration, even when the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed during the setting change, the LED (segment Dp) indicating that the setting is being changed is maintained without turning off the light. Can be displayed more reliably.

  In the present embodiment, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling an effect related to a game is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) controls the effect based on a set value (work setting value). The game control means (game control device 100) transmits information on the changed set values (final work set values and probability set values) to the effect control means (effect control device 300).

  With the above-described configuration, an effect corresponding to the changed set value can be executed. Therefore, by giving a variation to the effect, the interest in the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first and second embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to reception of an input in a setting change state.

[Probability setting change / confirmation processing]
First, a probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment.

  The processing of A2601 and A2602 is added to the probability setting change / confirmation processing according to the third embodiment in addition to the probability setting change / confirmation processing according to the first embodiment.

  After performing the processing from step A2401 to step A2410 in the probability setting change / confirmation processing according to the first embodiment as described above, the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input of a predetermined switch (A2601). ). The input of the predetermined switch is, for example, an input of a starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a), a gate switch 34a, and winning port switches 35a to 35n. In addition, the input of the predetermined switch includes interface chips (proximity I / F) such as a specific area switch 72, a special winning opening switch 43 of the special fluctuation winning device 38, 39, a remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and an out ball detection switch 74. ) 121 may be included (see FIG. 3).

  When a predetermined switch is input (the result of A2601 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), and ends the probability setting change / confirmation process.

  In the process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 a switch input command indicating that there has been a switch input. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 by the processing of step B3302 of the single-shot system command processing described later, and turns on the start port LED and the like. Similarly, the game control device 100 may output an on / off drive signal to the collective display device 50 via the second driver 138b and the third driver 138c to light the collective display device 50.

  On the other hand, when there is no input from the predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the probability setting change / confirmation process as it is.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of single-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

  The processes of B3301 and B3302 are added to the single command processing according to the third embodiment in addition to the single command processing according to the first embodiment.

  After performing the processing from step B1301 to step B1327 in the single command processing according to the first embodiment as described above, the effect control device 300 returns (B1327) if the MODE unit does not represent a setting confirmation command. Is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the switch input command (B3301). When the MODE section is within the range of the switch input command, the effect control device 300 has received the switch input command from the game control device 100 and determines that there is a switch input.

  When the MODE unit indicates a switch input command (result of B3301 is “Y”), effect control device 300 executes a switch input process (B3302), and ends the single-shot system command process.

  In the process at the time of switch input (B3302), the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command, turns on the start port LED, or displays a check item on the display screen of the display device 41. The effect control device 300 may sequentially turn on the decoration LED when receiving the switch input command, or operate the movable accessory and the speaker 19 (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b).

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the switch input command (the result of B3301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 performs the processing after step B1329 as described above in the single command processing according to the first embodiment. The process proceeds.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
With reference to FIG. 78, details of the hall / player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-described main process (FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the hall / player setting mode process according to the third embodiment. The hall / player setting mode process activates a hall setting mode in which a person in charge of the hall (game store) can make various settings of the gaming machine 10 or a player setting mode in which a player can make various settings of the gaming machine 10. be able to.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the hall setting mode is being set (B0401). When a later-described hall setting mode flag is set, it can be determined that the hall setting mode is in progress. When the hall setting mode is in effect (the result of B0401 is “Y”), the processing of B0406-B0416 is performed, and the director of the hall (game store) operates the production button 25 (production button switch 25a, touch panel 25b). Various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the.

  When not in the hall setting mode (result of B0401 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the game is in the player setting mode (B0402). When a later-described player setting mode flag is set, it can be determined that the game is in the player setting mode. When in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is “Y”), the processing of B0420 to B0425 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

  When not in the player setting mode (result of B0402 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0403). For example, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer or in a setting change state. It can be determined that it has been done. Note that “waiting for a customer” is, for example, a state in which an image for waiting for a customer (customer waiting demonstration) is displayed on the display device 41. In addition, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened during the setting change state (when an error / illegal command related to the front frame opening error is received (B1316)), the effect button input process (B0010). If the operation of the effect button 25 is detected as an operation signal in step ()), the hall setting mode may be set. If the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is “N”), the process of B0417 is executed.

  When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B0403 is “Y”), effect controller 300 draws a screen (draws a hole setting screen) on display device 41 in the hall setting mode. Start setting is performed (B0404). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is set (B0405).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts and sets the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall (B0406), the frame decoration device 18, Hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B0407) for adjusting and setting the LED brightness of the panel decoration device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B0408) for adjusting and setting the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41, power saving The power saving setting process (B0409) for setting is performed. The setting values relating to the speaker volume, the LED luminance, the luminance of the display device 41, and the setting values relating to the power saving setting are the setting values in the hall setting mode.

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the issued color of the logo combination and the like (B0410). Then, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation operation input has been made (B0411). When an operation signal due to the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that there is a setting confirmation operation input. If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process ends.

  When there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B0411 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting has been confirmed with the factory settings (B0412). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting has been confirmed with the factory settings. If it is not determined by the factory settings (result of B0412 is “N”), the process proceeds to B0414. When it is determined by the factory default setting (result of B0412 is “Y”), a factory default setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments with the factory default setting is executed (B0413). The factory settings are default settings stored in a memory such as the ROM 321. Next, hole setting data (or hole adjustment data) such as the volume and various luminances determined in B0406-B0410 and B0413 are written to a backup memory (for example, FeRAM 323) (B0414).

  Next, effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is cleared (B0416).

  If the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (result of B0403 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0417). During the customer waiting, for example, when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that the player setting mode start condition has been satisfied. If the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0417 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process ends.

  When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (result of B0417 is “Y”), effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B0418). Then, a flag in the player setting mode is set (B0419).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B0420), and performs the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. A player LED brightness adjustment process (B0421) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect customizing process described later for customizing (individual setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the like by the player (B0422). Then, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation operation input has been made (B0423). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B0423 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process ends. When the setting confirmation operation input is made (the result of B0423 is “Y”), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B0424). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B0425). Note that the player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as the volume and brightness determined in B0420-B0421 may be deleted, and is not written to the backup memory.

  In the above description, the drawing update setting (such as updating the highlight item in the menu display) after entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (B0010).

[Game board during setting change]
FIG. 79 is a front view of the game board 30 in a setting change state according to the third embodiment.

  In the game board 30 (including the center case 40) according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is provided in front of the general winning opening 35, respectively. The LED provided in front of the general-purpose starting gate 34 is a general-purpose starting gate LED 34L, and the LED provided in front of each general winning opening 35 is a general winning opening LED 35L.

  When the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment enters the setting change state, the effect control device 300 receives the command indicating that the probability setting is being changed, and indicates on the display screen of the display device 41 that the setting is being changed. Characters are displayed (setting change system information setting processing of B1326).

  Here, when the game control device 100 is in the setting change state (variable setting state, setting change mode), as described above with reference to FIG. 76, the setting values are set in the processing of steps A2601 and A2602 of the probability setting change / confirmation processing. Function as a control means capable of accepting inputs from the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, which are inputs different from the input relating to the change of. When the game control device 100 receives an input from the gate switch 34a or the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, the game control device 100 transmits a switch input command corresponding to the received input to the effect control device 300.

  When the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 in the processing of steps B3301 and B3302 of the single command processing of FIG. 77, the LED of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command is processed. (Usually starting gate LED 34L and general winning opening LED 35L) are turned on or blinked.

  Therefore, in the setting change state, by passing or winning a game ball to the general-purpose starting gate 34 or each general winning opening 35, the corresponding general-purpose starting gate LED 34L or general winning opening LED 35L lights or blinks. The operation check can be easily performed, and the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved. As a result, for example, the operation check of the gaming machine 10 can be easily performed at the time of factory shipment, so that the gaming machine 10 having an initial failure can be detected early.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 turns on or blinks the LED of the panel decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command (the ordinary start gate LED 34L or the general winning opening LED 35L), and then sequentially turns the other LEDs that are not supported. It may be turned on or blinked. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to easily check the operation of the LEDs of the various board decoration devices 46 simply by receiving any one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100. Performance can be improved.

  In addition, in response to receiving inputs from the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, the game control device 100 responds to the display units 51 to 60 (the LED lamps and the special figure 1 display 51) of the collective display device 50. , Special figure 2 display 52, general figure display 53, special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, general figure hold display 56, first game state display 57, second game state display The section 58, the third game state display section 59, and the round display section 60) may be appropriately turned on or blinked. In addition, the game control device 100 turns on or blinks the display unit (any of the display units 51 to 60) of the collective display device 50 corresponding to the received input, and then all the display units (display units 51 to 60). May be turned on or blinked to check the operation of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the collective display device 50 (processing of A2602). In addition, the operation check of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the collective display device 50 is not limited to the mode in which all the lights are turned on and all the lights are blinking, but may be a mode in which the lights are circulated so that it is easy to confirm that the light is emitted normally.

  Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 and performs the switch input process (B3302), as shown in FIG. 79, a check table is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. It may be displayed. In the check table, a normal operation checked display of, for example, “○” is displayed for each switch item corresponding to the received input.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 starts the check table as shown in FIG. 79 in response to the game control device 100 accepting the input of the start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a). A normal operation checked display ("O") may be displayed on the items of the opening 1 and the opening 2.

  Further, an LED (starting winning port LED 36L) of the board decoration device 46 is provided in front of the first starting winning port 36 (starting port 1, first starting winning area), and the LED is turned on in accordance with a corresponding switch input command. Or you may make it blink. Further, the effect control device 300 may operate the speakers 19 (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) as effect devices in accordance with the corresponding switch input command. At that time, for example, when the effect control device 300 receives a switch input command corresponding to the gate switch 34a, the effect control device 300 can give a voice notification of “Normal figure starting gate!” "General winning!"

  Further, during the setting change, the game control device 100 receives a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 output when the front frame 12 and the like are open, and sends an error / illegal command to the effect control device 300. If the effect control device 300 accepts the operation of the effect button 25 during transmission, the effect control device 300 determines that the processing of step B0403 of the hall / player setting mode processing has been established as described above with reference to FIG. 78. Judgment (result of B0403 is “Y”).

  Therefore, the effect control device 300 executes the processing after step B0404, so that the hall setting can be performed during the setting change. As described above, the game control device 100 functions as a control unit that can accept a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 as an input different from an input related to the change of the set value when in the setting change state. In addition, the effect control device 300 accepts the operation of the effect button 25 in a state where the front frame 12 or the like is open, thereby accepting an input related to the hall setting as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value during the setting change state, It functions as a control unit that can change the set value of the hall setting (for example, the volume of a speaker, the brightness of an LED, and the like).

[Another example of a gaming board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 80 is another example of a front view of the game board 30 during setting change according to the third embodiment.

  In the game board 30 of another example, as shown in FIG. 80, the effect control device 300 includes, in addition to the general-purpose starting gate LED 34L, the general winning opening LED 35L, and the starting special winning opening LED 36L, a general-purpose variable winning LED 37L, a first special variation. The winning LED 38L and the second special variable winning LED 39L also emit light. The normal figure variable winning LED 37L is an LED provided in front of the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2, second starting winning port). The first special variable winning LED 38L is an LED provided in front of the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning LED 39L is an LED provided in front of the second special variable winning device 39.

  The ordinary variable prize device 37, the first special variable prize device 38, and the second special variable prize device 39 whose settings are being changed are closed by a slide opening / closing movable member 37b and an attacker type opening / closing door 38c, 39c, respectively.

  Therefore, for example, in response to the effect button 25 being pressed while the setting is being changed, the effect control device 300 turns on or blinks the general-purpose variable winning LED 37L, the first special variable winning LED 38L, and the second special variable winning LED 39L. Can be done. It should be noted that the turning-on of the ordinary figure fluctuation winning LED 37L, the first special fluctuation winning LED 38L, and the second special fluctuation winning LED 39L may be performed sequentially or simultaneously.

  In addition, when there is an input of a predetermined switch (result of A2601 is “Y”), the game control device 100 opens the movable member 37b and the doors 38c and 39c to open the normal variable winning device 37 and the The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 may be set in a state where game balls can be directly won.

  Furthermore, in another example of the game board 30, the effect control device 300 can cause the upper effect unit LED 40cL and the side effect unit LED 40dL, which are LEDs of the board decoration device 46, to emit light. The upper effect unit LED 40cL is an LED provided in the upper effect unit 40c. The side effect unit LED 40dL is an LED provided on the blade portion of the sword of the character of the side effect unit 40d. The effect control device 300 turns on or blinks the upper effect unit LED 40cL and the side effect unit LED 40dL, for example, in response to the effect button 25 or the like being pressed during setting change. The lighting of the upper effect unit LED 40cL and the side effect unit LED 40dL may be performed sequentially or simultaneously.

  In this way, by causing the LED of the accessory (decorative member) to emit light in addition to the LED of the winning opening and the winning device, the operation check of the LED of the accessory (decorative member) can be easily performed, and the gaming machine 10 The maintainability can be improved. In addition, at the time of light emission, the maintainability may be further improved by moving the movable role as a staging device so that it is possible to confirm whether the motor of the movable role or the like normally operates.

  In addition, for example, in response to pressing of the effect button 25 or the like during setting change, the effect control device 300 responds to depression of the lamp display device 80 (lamp display units 1 to 6 (LED )) May be combined to emit light.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the stop result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (identification information, special decoration pattern, first decoration pattern A to C, this special figure) is variable displayed. When a special result (big hit result) is obtained, a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be generated. The gaming machine 10 includes control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for performing control related to the game, setting change means (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the set value related to the game condition. , Is provided. The control unit is capable of receiving an input different from an input relating to the change of the set value when the control unit is in a setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed by the setting change unit.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is in a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed, the control unit can receive an input related to management and maintenance of the gaming machine 10 such as a hall setting and an operation check. The manageability and maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) performs a predetermined input (front frame opening) as an input different from an input related to change of a set value during a setting change state. When a signal from the detection switch 64 and a signal from the effect button 25) are received, a set value different from the set value (a set value in the hall setting) can be changed together with the set value during the set change state.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, the setting value of the hall setting and the like can be changed as the setting value different from the setting value related to the game condition when the setting is changed, so that the person in charge of the game hall (game store) Can improve the maintainability. Normally, the setting change state is shifted by the operation of the person in charge of the amusement arcade (game arcade), so that the setting value of the hall setting can be changed in the setting change state, and thus the game arcade can be changed. Unnecessary change of the set value of the hall setting by a person who is not the person responsible for the above can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes a collective display device in addition to a light emitting device capable of emitting light (the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 (especially, the LEDs in front of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening)). 50 display units 51 to 60), a predetermined area provided in the game area 32 and through which a game ball can enter or pass, and a detection means capable of detecting the entry or passage of the game ball into the predetermined area. Prepare. The control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) causes the light emitting device to emit light when receiving an input from the detection means as a different input.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting is changed, it is possible to easily check the operation of the various detecting means to be able to normally detect the game ball and the normal light emission of the various light emitting devices. The maintainability of the machine 10 can be improved.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a plurality of light emitting devices (devices for staging such as LEDs of the board decoration device 46) are provided. The control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) can sequentially change the display of the plurality of light emitting devices to a predetermined display mode (for example, light emission) during the setting change state.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, the effect control device 300 receives only one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100 and, during the setting change state, various light-emitting devices (for the board decoration device 46). Since it is possible to easily check the operation of the LED and the effect device, it is possible to improve the maintainability of the gaming machine 10.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided in the gaming area 32 with an effect device (display device 41, board decoration device 46, lamp display device 80, etc.) capable of displaying an effect display, and a game ball is provided. A predetermined area where a ball can enter or pass (a general starting gate 34, each general winning opening 35, a first starting winning opening 36 (a first starting winning area), a second starting winning opening (a second starting win) of the normal variable winning device 37. Winning area) and detection means (gate switch 34a, winning port switches 35a to 35n, starting port switch, etc.) capable of detecting entering or passing of a game ball into a predetermined area. When the control unit receives an input from the detection unit as a different input, the display of the effect device can be changed to a predetermined display mode (light emission of an LED, display of a normal operation checked display on a check table).

  According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, when the setting is changed, a game ball is passed or entered into the general-purpose starting gate 34, the general winning opening 35, or the like as a predetermined area, so that the corresponding general-purpose image is formed. Since the start gate LED 34L and the general winning opening LED 35L can be turned on or off or a check table of passing or entering the ball can be displayed on the display device 41, the operation can be easily checked and the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved. Can be. As a result, for example, the operation check of the gaming machine 10 can be easily performed at the time of factory shipment, so that the gaming machine 10 having an initial failure can be detected early.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is an effect device capable of executing an effect (display device 41, LED of the board decoration device 46, in addition to the speaker 19, and the upper effect of the board effect device 44 (movable auditorium and the like). Unit 40c, side effect unit 40d, etc.). The control means (effect control device 300) can operate the effect device when the setting is changed.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, as a staging device, in addition to the light emission of the LED of the board decoration device 46, a sound is notified from the speaker 19, and at the time of light emission, a movable role as a staging device is movable. By doing so, when the setting is changed, the operation of the motor of the speaker 19 and the movable role as well as the operation of the LED of the board effect device 44 can be easily checked, and the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 is further improved. Can be done.

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and redundant description will be omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to an operation of the gaming machine 10 when a power failure occurs in a special game state and power is restored.

[Timing chart for special operation state of normal operation]
First, with reference to FIG. 81, the timing of signal output and the like in the special game state of the normal operation in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of signal output timing and the like in the special game state of the normal operation according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, as shown in FIG. 81, at time t1, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs, the external information is displayed in the special figure 1 displaying processing (FIG. 37) or the special figure 2 displaying processing (FIG. 38). As a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) saved in the output data area, for example, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output. The signal relating to the start of the jackpot is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer). Specifically, the output of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is started when the stop result (display result) of the variable display game becomes the big hit result (special result). The power of the gaming machine 10 is kept on, and the security signal is off.

  The big hit 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area by the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing (A5714) of the special figure 1 displaying processing (FIG. 37) when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, or If the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (A5816) of the special figure 2 displaying processing (FIG. 38). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the external information output data area in step A5709 of the special figure 1 displaying process (FIG. 37), or the special figure 2 variable display game is In the case of, the data is saved in the external information output data area in step A5811 of the special figure 2 displaying process (FIG. 38).

  When the first big hit ends at time t2, the output of one big hit signal is turned off. Specifically, the output of one signal of the big hit is that the signal about the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area by the end of the special game state, that is, the big hit end processing (FIGS. 40 and 41) after the round game. And it turns off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, the time saving state (general power support state, specific game state) or the probable change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state) is maintained, and the output of the two big hit signals remains on. Is done.

  Specifically, when the off data of one big hit signal is the end of the big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game, the big hit one signal is turned off, so that the step A6112 of the special figure 1 big hit end processing (FIG. 40). Is saved in the external information output data area. In addition, when the off data of one big hit signal is the end of the big hit by the special figure 2 variable display game, in order to turn off one big hit signal, the external information is set in step A6212 of the special figure 2 big hit end processing (FIG. 41). Saved in the output data area.

  When the big hit 2 signal is reduced to the time saving state after the big hit end, the signal is saved in the external information output data area in step A6501 of the big hit end setting processing 2 and output (ON state) is continued. If the big hit 2 signal changes to a certain state after the big hit end, the signal is saved in the external information output data area in step A6801 of the big hit end setting processing 3 and output (ON state) is continued.

  Subsequently, at time t3, when a big hit occurs again, that is, when a second big hit occurs, the output of one big hit signal is turned on.

  Then, at the time t4, when the second big hit ends, the output of one big hit signal is turned off. Also, the second big hit corresponds to a normal big hit symbol (for example, a 10R normal big hit symbol), and the time reduction judgment data is data with a shortened time, and there is no specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is “N )) (No V prize), and the big hit end setting process 2 is executed (A6103). Therefore, after the end of the second big hit, the state is reduced to the time reduction state (general power support state).

  Thereafter, at time t5, when the variation display game in the time reduction state reaches, for example, 100 times after the end of the second big hit, the number of remaining games in the time reduction state (the number of time reduction fluctuations) becomes 0 and the time reduction state ends. I do. At this time, the output of the two big hits is turned off because the off data of the two big hits is saved in the external information output data area in step A5105 of the time reduction variation number update process. In addition, when a game including a special game state or the like is being played in the normal operation, the power of the gaming machine 10 is kept on, and the security signal is kept off.

  Note that, unlike the above, if the probability change state is reached after the end of the second big hit, the probability change state ends when the falling lottery is won in the fall lottery process (FIG. 20). The two big hit signals are saved in the external information output data area (A3704) and turned off.

[Timing chart for normal recovery after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 82, in the fourth embodiment, a timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state and the normal recovery is performed by the power recovery will be described. FIG. 82 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment and the power is restored to a normal state by a power recovery. In FIGS. 82 to 86 described below, descriptions overlapping with the contents described in FIG. 81 and the like will be omitted as appropriate.

  At time t1, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs, as in FIG. 81 described above, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output. Further, the security signal is maintained in the off state.

  At time t11, when a power failure occurs during the first big hit (for example, during a round game), as shown in FIG. 82, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, and the big hit game is interrupted. When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are turned off.

  At time t12, when the power is restored (power failure is restored) and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure restoration process (A1045) of the main process. The output state (ON state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is saved (stored) in the RAM at the time of the power failure (A1057, A1058), and the game control device 100 outputs the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal at the time of power recovery. The save data (storage information) about the output state, that is, the big hit state is internally held (maintained). Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal that were on before the power failure are turned on, and the first jackpot game is restarted.

  When the first big hit is completed at time t13, the output of one big hit signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, it is in a time-saving state (general power support state) or a probable change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the two big hit signals is kept on.

  Thereafter, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t14 to time t16 is similar to the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the power failure occurs during the second big hit, the time saving state, or the probable change state, the one big hit signal and the two big hit signals are similarly turned off. Then, when the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure restoration process (A1045) of the main process, and the second big hit, the time saving state or the probable change state is restarted. can do.

[Timing chart when a memory error occurs after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 83, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state and a memory abnormality occurs in the power recovery in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of signal output timing when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment and a memory abnormality occurs upon power recovery.

  At time t1, the first big hit (special game state) occurs and the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are output in the same manner as in FIG. 81 and the like described above, and then at time t21, a power failure occurs during the first big hit. When this occurs, the signal of the jackpot 1 and the two jackpots are also turned off when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  At time t22, when the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and a memory abnormality occurs in the RAM (here, the RAM 111c), the output of the security signal is turned on. Specifically, when it is determined in the main process that the RAM abnormality flag is set (result of A1022 is “Y”), ON data of the security signal is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal (A1026). Also, while the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), and a timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing. Since (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure change display game, ordinary figure change display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the irregularities of the RAM abnormality from being reflected in the game.

  The output state (ON state) of one big hit signal and two big hit signals saved (stored) in the RAM as save data (storage information) at the time of a power failure is read in the power failure recovery process at the time of power recovery. Therefore, at the time of normal restoration, one big hit signal and two big hit signals can be output as shown by the broken lines in FIG. However, since a memory abnormality of the RAM has occurred, the game control device 100 turns on the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83, while holding one big hit signal held as shown by the broken line in FIG. And does not output two jackpot signals.

  Thereafter, at time t23, the power is turned off once, and when the power is turned on thereafter, when it is determined that the setting key switch 93 (setting key) and the RAM initialization switch 112 are pressed (on), the result of A1021 is displayed. "Y"), the mode is shifted to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), the probability set value is cleared due to RAM abnormality (A1028), and the security signal is turned on (A1034). Then, the setting key switch 93 is turned off (result of A1036 is “Y”), and when the setting change state ends, the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (RAM clear) (A1042), and the initialization is performed. (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are also turned off. Further, the memory abnormality of the gaming machine 10 is eliminated. On the other hand, the big hit state is also reset, the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, and the stop symbol is also a lost symbol.

  Also, when a power failure occurs during the second big hit, during the time saving state, or during the probable change state, similarly, a memory abnormality occurs, the RAM is cleared and initialized, and the gaming machine 10 enters the normal gaming state. Become.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting confirmation state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 84, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state, the power is restored normally by the power recovery, and the state shifts to the setting check state (setting check mode) will be described. I do. FIG. 84 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, the power recovers normally, and the state shifts to the setting confirmation state.

  After the first big hit occurs at time t1 as in FIG. 81 and the like, and one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output, when a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t31, the gaming machine 10 When the power supply is turned off, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are turned off.

  At time t32, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state) and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting checking flag is set. Then, the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting confirmation state in which the probability set value (set value) can be confirmed (A1305).

  When the state shifts to the setting confirmation state at time t32, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 84 (A2406). On the other hand, the big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83 (A2406).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 83, the output state (ON state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is saved in the RAM at the time of the power failure (A1057, A1058), and also at the time of power recovery is shown by the broken line in FIG. As described above, the save data relating to the output state (ON state) of one big hit signal and two big hit signals is held.

  Then, at time t33, the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (the result of A1036 is “Y”), and when the power failure recovery processing is performed (A1045), the security signal is turned off.

  The output states of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) in the RAM as save data (storage information) at the time of a power failure are read and turned on in the power failure recovery processing after the setting confirmation state ends. Become. Therefore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the first big hit game is restarted. Then, the same number of rounds as the jackpot game (special game) during normal operation without a power outage is consumed over the same time.

  When the first big hit ends at time t34, the output of one big hit signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, it is in a time-saving state (general power support state) or a probable change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the two big hit signals is kept on.

  Thereafter, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t35 to time t36 is similar to the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above with reference to FIG.

  When a power failure occurs during the second big hit, during a time saving state, or during a probable change state, the power is restored, and the state shifts to the setting confirmation state. When the setting confirmation state ends, the power failure recovery processing (A1045) of the main process causes a game The machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure, and the second big hit, the time saving state, or the probable change state can be resumed.

[Timing chart for shifting to the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state]
Referring to FIG. 85, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs during a special game state, a signal is output when the power is restored, and a transition is made to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). Will be described. FIG. 85 is a timing chart illustrating an example of timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, the power recovers normally, and shifts to the setting change state.

  After the first big hit occurs at time t1 as in FIG. 81 and the like and one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output, when a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t41, the gaming machine 10 When the power is turned off, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are turned off.

  At time t42, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed down (turned on), the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. The medium flag is set (A1029), and the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting change state in which the probability set value (set value) can be changed (A1305).

  When the state shifts to the setting change state at time t42, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 85 (A2406). On the other hand, the big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 85 (A2406).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 83, the output state (ON state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is saved in the RAM at the time of the power failure (A1057, A1058). As described above, the save data relating to the output state (ON state) of one big hit signal and two big hit signals is held.

  Then, at time t43, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (result of A1036 is “Y”), the probability setting change flag is set (result of A1040 is “Y”). ), The RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (RAM clear) (A1042) and initialized (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are also turned off. Therefore, when the setting change state ends, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored, but the RAM is cleared, the big hit state is reset, and the gaming machine 10 enters the normal gaming state, and the stopped symbol becomes a lost symbol.

  In addition, when the power failure occurs during the second big hit, during the time saving state, or during the probable change state, similarly, when the setting change state ends, the RAM is cleared and initialized, and the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state. Becomes

(Timing chart when the power is turned off in the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state)
Referring to FIG. 86, in the fourth embodiment, a power outage occurs during the special game state, and the power is turned off after the power is restored to normal and the state is changed to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). The timing of signal output and the like at the time of this is described. FIG. 86 is an example of a timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, and the power is turned off after the power is restored after normal power recovery to the setting change state. FIG.

  The signal output when the power failure occurs after the first big hit from time t1 to time t52 and the power is restored in the setting change state is the same as the signal output from time t1 to time t42 described above with reference to FIG. In addition, at the time of shifting to the setting change state at the time t52, the probability setting change flag is set as in the case of the time t42 in FIG. 85 (A1029).

  Thereafter, at time t53, when the power is turned off in the setting change state (or when the power fails again), the output of the security signal is turned off. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 85, the save data relating to the output state (ON state) of one big hit signal and two big hit signals is held similarly to the broken lines up to FIG. Further, since the saved data saved in the RAM cannot be read when the power is turned off, the broken lines of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal when the power is turned off are off. Note that the probability setting change flag remains set (result of A1037 is “Y”, A1057, A1058).

  At time t54, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is not turned on (result of A1021 is "N") and the power is turned on, the probability setting change flag is set (A1023). The result is “Y”), and ON data of the security signal is output (A1026). On the other hand, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 86 (A1026). Therefore, the big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are not output, although the output state (ON state) is held as save data in the RAM as shown by the broken line in FIG. 86. In addition, while the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and the apparatus is in a standby state, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, so that the game (special figure change display game, ordinary figure change display game) cannot be executed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent an unexpected process (a process of restoring power after a power failure in the setting change state) from being reflected in the game. Thereafter, the RAM is cleared (A1042) in the same manner as at time t23 in FIG. 83, and the normal state can be restored. At that time, the big hit state is reset.

[Operation and Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a result (stop result) of a game (for example, a special figure change display game, a change display game) is a special result (big hit result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a (big hit game state) is provided. The gaming machine 10 has a storage device (RAM of the game control device 100) in which information relating to the game is stored and capable of storing and holding the stored information even if a power failure occurs. The control means can output a signal (one big hit signal) upon occurrence of the special game state, and hold the signal during a restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state. If an abnormality in the information recorded in the storage means is detected, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is output and no signal (one big hit signal) is output.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, when a power failure occurs during the occurrence of a special game state, and when an abnormality in information recorded in the holding storage unit is detected during a restart process when power is restored, Does not output a signal (one big hit signal) that is output when a special game state occurs, but outputs a security signal, so that when power is restored, it is possible to notify that the game machine has been tampered with. . By reporting the fraud, the person in charge of the amusement arcade (game store) can take measures against fraud.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes a setting change unit (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) relating to a game condition. The control means (game control device 100) can output a signal (one big hit signal) upon occurrence of a special game state (big hit game state), and after a power failure occurs during the special game state, the set value is set. Outputs a security signal to notify an abnormality during a restart process when a power failure occurs and power is restored in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which can be changed, and a signal (one big hit signal) Is not output.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, during a restart process when a power failure occurs and power is restored in the setting change state, a signal (one big hit signal) output when a special gaming state occurs is not output. , The security signal is output, so that it is possible to notify that an unexpected process is being performed on the gaming machine in the setting change state. With this notification, the person in charge of the game arcade (game store) can take a countermeasure for an unexpected process (a process in which a power failure occurs and power is restored in the setting change state) performed on the gaming machine.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when a result (stop result) of a game (for example, a special figure change display game, a change display game) is a special result (big hit result), a special game advantageous to the player. Control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (big hit game state) and a specific game state (time saving state, probability change state) is provided. The gaming machine 10 has a storage device (RAM of the game control device 100) in which information relating to the game is stored and capable of storing and holding the stored information even if a power failure occurs. The control means can start outputting a signal (two big hits) upon the occurrence of the special game state, and can output the signal until the specific game state after the special game state ends, and can output the special game state or the specific game state. If a power failure occurs during the occurrence of a state, and an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage unit is detected during a restart process when the power is restored, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is issued. Output and no signal (two big hits).

  According to such a gaming machine 10, after a power failure occurs during the special gaming state or the specific gaming state, during the restart processing when the power is restored, the abnormality of the information recorded in the holding storage unit is determined. If detected, the security signal is output without outputting the signal (two big hits) output when the special gaming state occurs, so that when the power is restored, the gaming machine is tampered with. I can tell you that. By reporting the fraud, the person in charge of the amusement arcade (game store) can take measures against fraud.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes a setting change unit (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) relating to a game condition. The control means (game control device 100) can start outputting a signal (two big hits) upon occurrence of a special game state (big hit game state), and a specific game state (time saving state, probable change state) after the special game state. Can be output until the operation is completed, and after a power failure occurs during the special game state or the specific game state, a power failure occurs in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which set values can be changed. During a restart process when power is restored, a security signal for notifying an abnormality is output and no signal (two big hits) is output.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, during the restart processing when the power is restored and the power is restored in the setting change state, the signal (two big hits) output when the special gaming state occurs is not output. , The security signal is output, so that it is possible to notify that an unexpected process is being performed on the gaming machine in the setting change state. With this notification, the person in charge of the game arcade (game store) can take a countermeasure for an unexpected process (a process in which a power failure occurs and power is restored in the setting change state) performed on the gaming machine.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is apparent that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a plurality of embodiments can be combined. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (such as slot machines). The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 production button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning area (first start winning area)
37 Ordinary Fluctuation Winning Device 38 First Special Fluctuation Winning Device 39 Second Special Fluctuation Winning Device 40 Center Case 41 Display Device 44 Board Direction Device 46 Board Decoration Device 50 Collective Display Device (LED)
93 Setting key switch 100 Game control device (main board)
112 RAM initialization switch 152 performance display device 200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (4)

When the stop result of the variable display game for displaying the identification information in a variable manner is a special result, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player,
Control means for controlling the game;
Setting change means capable of changing a set value relating to a game condition,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means is capable of accepting an input different from an input relating to the change of the set value when the set value is changeable by the setting change means.   The control means, when receiving a predetermined input as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value during the setting change state, changes the set value different from the set value together with the set value during the set change state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being operated. A light emitting device capable of emitting light,
A predetermined area provided in the game area, in which a game ball can enter or pass;
Detecting means capable of detecting entering or passing of a game ball to the predetermined area,
With
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the control unit causes the light emitting device to emit light when receiving the input from the detection unit as the different input. The light emitting device is provided in plurality,
4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the control unit is capable of sequentially changing the display of the plurality of light emitting devices to a predetermined display mode during the setting change state. 5.